From 0323e13b39a8a00ede4a3242bddfc6d8343acdaa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dean Camera <dean@fourwalledcubicle.com>
Date: Tue, 9 Jun 2009 04:30:12 +0000
Subject: Copy over schedulerless host demos to ClassDrivers directory, for
later modification to new Host mode USB class drivers.
---
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.c | 231 +++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.h | 86 ++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt | 59 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 255 ++++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 85 ++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/makefile | 733 ++++++++++
.../ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 174 +++
.../ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 69 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++
.../ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c | 295 ++++
.../ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h | 96 ++
.../ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt | 55 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/makefile | 733 ++++++++++
.../ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 145 ++
.../ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 72 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c | 287 ++++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h | 94 ++
.../Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt | 64 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile | 733 ++++++++++
.../KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c | 172 +++
.../KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h | 79 ++
.../KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++
.../ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c | 72 +
.../ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h | 80 ++
.../KeyboardHostWithParser.c | 295 ++++
.../KeyboardHostWithParser.h | 78 +
.../KeyboardHostWithParser.txt | 62 +
.../ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile | 735 ++++++++++
.../ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 172 +++
.../ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 75 +
.../Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++
.../MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c | 691 +++++++++
.../MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h | 175 +++
.../ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h | 85 ++
.../ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c | 380 +++++
.../ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h | 86 ++
.../MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt | 61 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile | 735 ++++++++++
.../Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 155 ++
.../Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 72 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c | 283 ++++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h | 95 ++
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt | 65 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile | 732 ++++++++++
.../MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c | 172 +++
.../MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h | 80 ++
.../ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++
.../ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c | 71 +
.../ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h | 89 ++
.../MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c | 305 ++++
.../MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h | 78 +
.../MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt | 62 +
.../Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile | 735 ++++++++++
.../ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c | 192 +++
.../ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h | 75 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf | 1485 ++++++++++++++++++++
.../ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h | 51 +
.../StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c | 279 ++++
.../StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h | 110 ++
.../ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c | 382 +++++
.../ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h | 84 ++
.../ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt | 58 +
Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile | 733 ++++++++++
66 files changed, 25137 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/makefile
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/makefile
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
create mode 100644 Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile
(limited to 'Demos')
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a5e81ae4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,231 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the CDCHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "CDCHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ SetupHardware();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY
+ "CDC Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF));
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ CDC_Host_Task();
+ USB_USBTask();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+ LEDs_Init();
+ USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ * stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ USB_ShutDown();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ * enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in
+ * data received from the attached CDC device and print it to the serial port.
+ */
+void CDC_Host_Task(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ switch (USB_HostState)
+ {
+ case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+ .wValue = 1,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+ puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+ if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+ {
+ if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+ else
+ puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("CDC Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Ready:
+ /* Select and the data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
+
+ /* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+ if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+ {
+ /* Check if data is in the pipe */
+ if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Get the length of the pipe data, and create a new buffer to hold it */
+ uint16_t BufferLength = Pipe_BytesInPipe();
+ uint8_t Buffer[BufferLength];
+
+ /* Read in the pipe data to the temporary buffer */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, BufferLength);
+
+ /* Print out the buffer contents to the USART */
+ for (uint16_t BufferByte = 0; BufferByte < BufferLength; BufferByte++)
+ putchar(Buffer[BufferByte]);
+ }
+
+ /* Clear the pipe after it is read, ready for the next packet */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+ }
+
+ /* Select and unfreeze the notification pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Check if a packet has been received */
+ if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+ {
+ /* Discard the unused event notification */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+ }
+
+ /* Freeze notification IN pipe after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5dcbc8e8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for CDCHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CDC_HOST_H_
+#define _CDC_HOST_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+ #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Pipe number for the CDC data IN pipe */
+ #define CDC_DATAPIPE_IN 1
+
+ /** Pipe number for the CDC data OUT pipe */
+ #define CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT 2
+
+ /** Pipe number for the CDC notification pipe */
+ #define CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE 3
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void SetupHardware(void);
+ void CDC_Host_Task(void);
+
+ void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4fac1d03d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/CDCHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage CDC Host Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Host</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * CDC host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference application
+ * for implementing a USB CDC host, for CDC devices using the standard ACM profile.
+ *
+ * This demo prints out received CDC data through the serial port.
+ *
+ * Not that this demo is only compatible with devices which report the correct CDC
+ * and ACM class, subclass and protocol values. Most USB-Serial cables have vendor
+ * specific features, thus use vendor-specific class/subclass/protocol codes to force
+ * the user to use specialized drivers. This demo is not compatible with such devices.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..baf02a216
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,255 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
+ * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ * with compatible devices.
+ *
+ * This routine searches for a CDC interface descriptor containing bulk data IN and OUT endpoints, and an interrupt event endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return An error code from the CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+ uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData;
+ uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+ uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+ /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */
+ if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ControlError;
+
+ /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */
+ if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE)
+ return DescriptorTooLarge;
+
+ /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */
+ ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize);
+
+ /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+ USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData);
+
+ /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+ return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+
+ /* Get the CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the CDC interface */
+ while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN) | (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT)))
+ {
+ /* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Check to see if the control interface's notification pipe has been found, if so search for the data interface */
+ if (FoundEndpoints & (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE))
+ {
+ /* Get the next CDC data interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextCDCDataInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Clear the found endpoints mask, since any already processed endpoints aren't in the CDC interface we need */
+ FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+ /* Disable any already configured pipes from the invalid CDC interfaces */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
+ Pipe_DisablePipe();
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
+ Pipe_DisablePipe();
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT);
+ Pipe_DisablePipe();
+
+ /* Get the next CDC control interface from the configuration descriptor (CDC class has two CDC interfaces) */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextCDCControlInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoCDCInterfaceFound;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Fetch the next bulk or interrupt endpoint from the current CDC interface */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoEndpointFound;
+ }
+ }
+
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+ /* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
+ if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+ {
+ /* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */
+ if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ {
+ /* Configure the notification pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+ Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+ /* Set the flag indicating that the notification pipe has been found */
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_NOTIFICATIONPIPE);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
+ if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ {
+ /* Configure the data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_IN, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_IN);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << CDC_DATAPIPE_OUT);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Valid data found, return success */
+ return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC control Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct control interface found */
+ if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == CDC_CONTROL_CLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL))
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct CDC data Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the CDC descriptor class, subclass and protocol, break out if correct data interface found */
+ if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == CDC_DATA_CLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL))
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next bulk IN or OUT endpoint, or interrupt IN endpoint within the current interface,
+ * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint (so that it may be compared
+ * using a different comparator to determine if it is another CDC class interface).
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+ {
+ uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+ if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1a118cad3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "CDCHost.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Interface Class value for the CDC class */
+ #define CDC_CONTROL_CLASS 0x02
+
+ /** Interface Class value for the CDC Communication Interface subclass */
+ #define CDC_CONTROL_SUBCLASS 0x02
+
+ /** Interface Class value for the CDC protocol */
+ #define CDC_CONTROL_PROTOCOL 0x01
+
+ /** Interface Class value for the CDC data class */
+ #define CDC_DATA_CLASS 0x0A
+
+ /** Interface Class value for the CDC data subclass (unused) */
+ #define CDC_DATA_SUBCLASS 0x00
+
+ /** Interface Class value for the CDC data protocol */
+ #define CDC_DATA_PROTOCOL 0x00
+
+ /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */
+ #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+ enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+ {
+ SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+ ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+ DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+ InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoCDCInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible CDC interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< Compatible CDC endpoints were not found in the device's CDC interface */
+ };
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+ uint8_t DComp_NextCDCControlInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextCDCDataInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceCDCDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..320951a5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - CDC Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..dfbefbb80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/CDCHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,733 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = CDCHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..29fa60ba3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
+ * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ * with compatible devices.
+ *
+ * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return An error code from the GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+ uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData;
+ uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+
+ uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+ /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */
+ if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ControlError;
+
+ /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */
+ if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE)
+ return DescriptorTooLarge;
+
+ /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */
+ ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize);
+
+ /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+ USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData);
+
+ /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+ return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+
+ /* Get the HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+ }
+
+ while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
+ {
+ /* Get the next HID interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor
+ * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */
+ if (FoundEndpoints == (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE))
+ break;
+
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoEndpointFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+ /* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+ if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ {
+ /* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Valid data found, return success */
+ return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ /* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == HID_CLASS)
+ {
+ /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+ {
+ /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+ }
+
+ /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b58d44027
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "GenericHIDHost.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+ #define HID_CLASS 0x03
+
+ /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */
+ #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+ enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+ {
+ SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+ ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+ DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+ InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+ };
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+ uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceHIDDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0626a8a8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Generic HID Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ac764fad0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,295 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the GenericHIDHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "GenericHIDHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ SetupHardware();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY
+ "Generic HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF));
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ HID_Host_Task();
+ USB_USBTask();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+ LEDs_Init();
+ USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ * stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ USB_ShutDown();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ * enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ * contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void ReadNextReport(void)
+{
+ /* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+ if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+ {
+ /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+ if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ uint8_t ReportINData[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+ /* Read in HID report data */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&ReportINData, sizeof(ReportINData));
+
+ /* Print report data through the serial port */
+ for (uint16_t CurrByte = 0; CurrByte < sizeof(ReportINData); CurrByte++)
+ printf_P(PSTR("0x%02X "), ReportINData[CurrByte]);
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+ }
+
+ /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+ /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Writes a report to the attached device.
+ *
+ * \param ReportOUTData Buffer containing the report to send to the device
+ * \param ReportIndex Index of the report in the device (zero if the device does not use multiple reports)
+ * \param ReportType Type of report to send, either HID_REPORTTYPE_OUTPUT or HID_REPORTTYPE_FEATURE
+ * \param ReportLength Length of the report to send
+ */
+void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData, uint8_t ReportIndex, uint8_t ReportType, uint16_t ReportLength)
+{
+ /* Select and unfreeze HID data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+ /* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the
+ * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */
+ if (Pipe_IsConfigured())
+ {
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */
+ if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+ {
+ /* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* If the report index is used, send it before the report data */
+ if (ReportIndex)
+ Pipe_Write_Byte(ReportIndex);
+
+ /* Write out HID report data */
+ Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength);
+
+ /* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */
+ Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+ /* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetReport,
+ .wValue = ((ReportType << 8) | ReportIndex),
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = ReportLength,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request to the device */
+ USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData);
+ }
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ * HID reports from the device and to send reports if desired.
+ */
+void HID_Host_Task(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
+ switch (USB_HostState)
+ {
+ case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+ .wValue = 1,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+ puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+ if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+ {
+ if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+ else
+ puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Ready:
+ ReadNextReport();
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..415dae023
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _GENERICHID_HOST_H_
+#define _GENERICHID_HOST_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+ #include <avr/interrupt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+ #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Pipe number for the HID data IN pipe */
+ #define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE 1
+
+ /** Pipe number for the HID data OUT pipe */
+ #define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2
+
+ /** HID Class specific request to send a HID report to the device. */
+ #define REQ_SetReport 0x09
+
+ /** HID Report type specifier, for output reports to a device */
+ #define HID_REPORTTYPE_OUTPUT 0x02
+
+ /** HID Report type specifier, for feature reports to a device */
+ #define HID_REPORTTYPE_FEATURE 0x03
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void SetupHardware(void);
+ void HID_Host_Task(void);
+
+ void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+ void ReadNextReport(void);
+ void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* ReportOUTData, uint8_t ReportIndex, uint8_t ReportType, uint16_t ReportLength);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d72dda103
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/GenericHIDHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Generic HID Host Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Host</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Generic HID host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a Generic HID USB host, for any device implementing
+ * the HID profile.
+ *
+ * Received reports from the attached device are printed to the serial port.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a07acb438
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/GenericHIDHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,733 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = GenericHIDHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e586ea5d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
+ * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ * with compatible devices.
+ *
+ * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return An error code from the KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+ uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData;
+ uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+
+ /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */
+ if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ControlError;
+
+ /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */
+ if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE)
+ return DescriptorTooLarge;
+
+ /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */
+ ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize);
+
+ /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+ USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData);
+
+ /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+ return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+
+ /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoEndpointFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+ /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+ /* Valid data found, return success */
+ return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+ if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL))
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+ {
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..425f0a4be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "KeyboardHost.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+ #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03
+
+ /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */
+ #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01
+
+ /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */
+ #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+ enum KeyboardHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+ {
+ SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+ ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+ DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+ InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+ };
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+ uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3bdbc95ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..64bcf0906
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,287 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the KeyboardHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ SetupHardware();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY
+ "Keyboard HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF));
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ Keyboard_HID_Task();
+ USB_USBTask();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+ LEDs_Init();
+ USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ * stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ USB_ShutDown();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ * enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ * contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void ReadNextReport(void)
+{
+ USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t KeyboardReport;
+
+ /* Select keyboard data pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE);
+
+ /* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+ if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+ {
+ /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+ if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Read in keyboard report data */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&KeyboardReport, sizeof(KeyboardReport));
+
+ /* Indicate if the modifier byte is non-zero (special key such as shift is being pressed) */
+ LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDS_LED1, (KeyboardReport.Modifier) ? LEDS_LED1 : 0);
+
+ /* Check if a key has been pressed */
+ if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode)
+ {
+ /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
+ if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED2)
+ LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+ else
+ LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+
+ char PressedKey = 0;
+
+ /* Retrieve pressed key character if alphanumeric */
+ if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x1D))
+ PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A';
+ else if ((KeyboardReport.KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyboardReport.KeyCode <= 0x27))
+ PressedKey = (KeyboardReport.KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0';
+ else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x2C)
+ PressedKey = ' ';
+ else if (KeyboardReport.KeyCode == 0x28)
+ PressedKey = '\n';
+
+ /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
+ if (PressedKey)
+ putchar(PressedKey);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+ /* Refreeze keyboard data pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ * HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ switch (USB_HostState)
+ {
+ case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+ .wValue = 1,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+ puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+ if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+ {
+ if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+ else
+ puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* HID class request to set the keyboard protocol to the Boot Protocol */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetProtocol,
+ .wValue = 0,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Ready:
+ /* If a report has been received, read and process it */
+ ReadNextReport();
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4aa09e1b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for KeyboardHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <avr/interrupt.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+ #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Pipe number for the keyboard data IN pipe */
+ #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1
+
+ /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */
+ #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Keyboard report */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Modifier; /**< Keyboard modifier byte, indicating pressed modifier keys (such as Shift, Control, etc.) */
+ uint8_t RESERVED; /**< Reserved for OEM use, always set to 0 */
+ uint8_t KeyCode; /**< Key code of the currently pressed key */
+ } USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
+
+ void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+ void ReadNextReport(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a3d5f717d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/KeyboardHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Host</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB keyboard, for USB keyboards using
+ * the standard keyboard HID profile.
+ *
+ * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1.
+ *
+ * This uses a naive method where the keyboard is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ * all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ * KeyboardHostWithParser demo application.
+ *
+ * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6e005da0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,733 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4ee3b998f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
+ * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ * with compatible devices.
+ *
+ * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
+ *
+ * \return An error code from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+ uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData;
+ uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+
+ /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */
+ if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ControlError;
+
+ /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */
+ if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE)
+ return DescriptorTooLarge;
+
+ /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */
+ ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize);
+
+ /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+ USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData);
+
+ /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+ return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+
+ /* Get the keyboard interface from the configuration descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextKeyboardInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the keyboard interface's HID descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoHIDDescriptorFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Save the HID report size for later use */
+ HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength;
+
+ /* Get the keyboard interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoEndpointFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+ /* Configure the keyboard data pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+ /* Valid data found, return success */
+ return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Keyboard HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+ if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == KEYBOARD_CLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL))
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+ {
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ else
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..338adc93b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "HIDReport.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+ #define KEYBOARD_CLASS 0x03
+
+ /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Keyboard compliant device */
+ #define KEYBOARD_PROTOCOL 0x01
+
+ /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */
+ #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512
+
+ /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */
+ #define DTYPE_HID 0x21
+
+ /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */
+ #define DTYPE_Report 0x22
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+ {
+ SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+ ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+ DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+ InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoHIDDescriptorFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
+ NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+ };
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+ uint8_t DComp_NextKeyboardInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceKeyboardDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6c6db18fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Keyboard Host (Using HID Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6ac1f5a65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
+uint16_t HIDReportSize;
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+
+/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
+ * structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
+{
+ /* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
+ uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
+
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+ .wValue = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = HIDReportSize,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
+ if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ParseControlError;
+
+ /* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
+ if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+ return ParseError;
+
+ return ParseSuccessful;
+}
+
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a141ffb8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for HIDReport.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h>
+
+ #include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a desktop keyboard */
+ #define USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD 0x07
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */
+ enum KeyboardHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
+ {
+ ParseSuccessful = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
+ ParseError = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
+ ParseControlError = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
+ };
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a HID descriptor. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+
+ uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */
+ uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */
+
+ uint8_t TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */
+
+ uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */
+ uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */
+ } USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+ /* External Variables: */
+ extern uint16_t HIDReportSize;
+ extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..620f158e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,295 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the KeyboardHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "KeyboardHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ SetupHardware();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY
+ "Keyboard HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF));
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ Keyboard_HID_Task();
+ USB_USBTask();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+ LEDs_Init();
+ USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ * stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ USB_ShutDown();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ * enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ * the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Keyboard_HID_Task(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ switch (USB_HostState)
+ {
+ case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+ .wValue = 1,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+ puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+ if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+ {
+ if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+ else
+ puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
+ if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Keyboard Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Ready:
+ /* Select and unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+ if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+ {
+ /* Check if data has been received from the attached keyboard */
+ if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Create buffer big enough for the report */
+ uint8_t KeyboardReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+ /* Load in the keyboard report */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(KeyboardReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe());
+
+ /* Process the read in keyboard report from the device */
+ ProcessKeyboardReport(KeyboardReport);
+ }
+
+ /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+ }
+
+ /* Freeze keyboard data pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Processes a read HID report from an attached keyboard, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
+ * as required and prints pressed characters to the serial port. Each time a key is typed, a board LED is toggled.
+ *
+ * \param KeyboardReport Pointer to a HID report from an attached keyboard device
+ */
+void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport)
+{
+ /* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for keyboard scan code reports */
+ for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+ {
+ /* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
+ HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+ /* Check if the current report item is a keyboard scancode */
+ if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_KEYBOARD) &&
+ (ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize == 8) &&
+ (ReportItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum > 1) &&
+ (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+ {
+ /* Retrieve the keyboard scancode from the report data retrieved from the device */
+ bool FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(KeyboardReport, ReportItem);
+
+ /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+ if (!(FoundData))
+ continue;
+
+ /* Key code is an unsigned char in length, cast to the appropriate type */
+ uint8_t KeyCode = (uint8_t)ReportItem->Value;
+
+ /* If scancode is non-zero, a key is being pressed */
+ if (KeyCode)
+ {
+ /* Toggle status LED to indicate keypress */
+ if (LEDs_GetLEDs() & LEDS_LED2)
+ LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+ else
+ LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDS_LED2);
+
+ char PressedKey = 0;
+
+ /* Convert scancode to printable character if alphanumeric */
+ if ((KeyCode >= 0x04) && (KeyCode <= 0x1D))
+ PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x04) + 'A';
+ else if ((KeyCode >= 0x1E) && (KeyCode <= 0x27))
+ PressedKey = (KeyCode - 0x1E) + '0';
+ else if (KeyCode == 0x2C)
+ PressedKey = ' ';
+ else if (KeyCode == 0x28)
+ PressedKey = '\n';
+
+ /* Print the pressed key character out through the serial port if valid */
+ if (PressedKey)
+ putchar(PressedKey);
+ }
+
+ /* Once a scancode is found, stop scanning through the report items */
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..90db94a2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+#define _KEYBOARD_HOST_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+ #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+ #include "HIDReport.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Pipe number for the keyboard report data pipe */
+ #define KEYBOARD_DATAPIPE 1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void Keyboard_HID_Task(void);
+ void SetupHardware(void);
+
+ void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+ void ProcessKeyboardReport(uint8_t* KeyboardReport);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cd3670673
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/KeyboardHostWithParser.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Keyboard Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Host</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Keyboard host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB Keyboard host, for USB keyboards using
+ * the standard Keyboard HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID reports,
+ * allowing for correct operation across all USB keyboards. This demo supports
+ * keyboards with a single HID report.
+ *
+ * Pressed alpha-numeric, enter or space key is transmitted through the serial
+ * USART at serial settings 9600, 8, N, 1. On connection to a USB keyboard, the
+ * report items will be processed and printed as a formatted list through the
+ * USART before the keyboard is fully enumerated.
+ *
+ * Currently only single interface keyboards are supported.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..393551268
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/KeyboardHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,735 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = KeyboardHostWithParser
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ HIDReport.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DUSB_HOST_ONLY -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c951c797e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
+ * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ * with compatible devices.
+ *
+ * This routine searches for a MSD interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ * \return An error code from the MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+ uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData;
+ uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+ uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+ /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */
+ if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ControlError;
+
+ /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */
+ if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE)
+ return DescriptorTooLarge;
+
+ /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */
+ ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize);
+
+ /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+ USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData);
+
+ /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+ return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+
+ /* Get the mass storage interface from the configuration descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextMassStorageInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoInterfaceFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the IN and OUT data endpoints for the mass storage interface */
+ while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
+ {
+ /* Fetch the next bulk endpoint from the current mass storage interface */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoEndpointFound;
+ }
+
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+ /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint, set appropriate globals */
+ if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ {
+ /* Configure the data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+ PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+ /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+ PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Valid data found, return success */
+ return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mass Storage Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMassStorageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+ if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MASS_STORE_CLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL))
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the correct MSD interface, aborting the search if
+ * another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+ {
+ uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+ /* Check the endpoint type, break out if correct BULK type endpoint found */
+ if (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK)
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6c0b8e6f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "MassStorageHost.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device class */
+ #define MASS_STORE_CLASS 0x08
+
+ /** Interface Class value for the Mass Storage Device subclass */
+ #define MASS_STORE_SUBCLASS 0x06
+
+ /** Interface Protocol value for the Bulk Only transport protocol */
+ #define MASS_STORE_PROTOCOL 0x50
+
+ /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */
+ #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+ enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+ {
+ SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+ ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+ DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+ InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible MSD interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< The correct MSD endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's MSD interface */
+ };
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+ uint8_t DComp_NextMassStorageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceBulkDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b154575bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mass Storage Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..afeace02f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.c
@@ -0,0 +1,691 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Mass Storage Device commands, to issue MSD commands to the device for
+ * reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics. This file
+ * also contains block read and write functions, so that device blocks
+ * can be read and written. In general, these functions would be chained
+ * to a FAT library to give file-level access to an attached device's contents.
+ *
+ * \note Many Mass Storage devices on the market are non-compliant to the
+ * specifications and thus can prove difficult to interface with. It
+ * may be necessary to retry the functions in the module several times
+ * after they have returned and error to successfully send the command
+ * to the device. Some devices may also need to have the stream function
+ * timeout period extended beyond 100ms (some badly designed devices exceeding
+ * 1.5 seconds occasionally) by defining USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS to a
+ * larger value in the project makefile and passing it to the compiler
+ * via the -D switch.
+ */
+
+#define INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C
+#include "MassStoreCommands.h"
+
+/* Globals: */
+/** Current CBW to send to the device. This is automatically filled by the routines
+ * in this file and is not externally accessible.
+ */
+static CommandBlockWrapper_t SCSICommandBlock;
+
+/** Current CSW received from the device. This is automatically filled by the routines
+ * in this file and is externally accessible so that the return codes may be checked.
+ */
+CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+/** Current Tag value used in issued CBWs to the device. This is automatically incremented
+ * by the routines in this file, and is not externally accessible.
+ */
+static uint32_t MassStore_Tag = 1;
+
+
+/** Routine to send the current CBW to the device, and increment the Tag value as needed.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+ /* Each transmission should have a unique tag value, excluding values 0 and 0xFFFFFFFF */
+ if (++MassStore_Tag == 0xFFFFFFFF)
+ MassStore_Tag = 1;
+
+ /* Select the OUT data pipe for CBW transmission */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Write the CBW command to the OUT pipe */
+ if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&SCSICommandBlock, sizeof(CommandBlockWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ return ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Send the data in the OUT pipe to the attached device */
+ Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+ while(!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()));
+
+ /* Freeze pipe after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Waits until the attached device is ready to accept data following a CBW, checking
+ * to ensure that the device has not stalled the transaction.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void)
+{
+ uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+ /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Wait until data received in the IN pipe */
+ while (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+ {
+ /* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */
+ if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+ {
+ /* Clear the flag and decrement the timeout period counter */
+ USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+ TimeoutMSRem--;
+
+ /* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */
+ if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+ }
+
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+ if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+ {
+ /* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */
+ MassStore_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+ }
+
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+ if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+ {
+ /* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */
+ MassStore_ClearPipeStall(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+ }
+
+ /* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */
+ if (!(USB_IsConnected))
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+ };
+
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Sends or receives the transaction's data stage to or from the attached device, reading or
+ * writing to the nominated buffer.
+ *
+ * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the data buffer to read from or write to
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(void* BufferPtr)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+ uint16_t BytesRem = SCSICommandBlock.Header.DataTransferLength;
+
+ /* Check the direction of the SCSI command data stage */
+ if (SCSICommandBlock.Header.Flags & COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN)
+ {
+ /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Read in the block data from the pipe */
+ if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ return ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Acknowledge the packet */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Select the OUT data pipe for data transmission */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Write the block data to the pipe */
+ if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(BufferPtr, BytesRem)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ return ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Acknowledge the packet */
+ Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+ while (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()));
+ }
+
+ /* Freeze used pipe after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Routine to receive the current CSW from the device.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+ /* If an error in the command ocurred, abort */
+ if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ return ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Load in the CSW from the attached device */
+ if ((ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&SCSICommandStatus, sizeof(CommandStatusWrapper_t))) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ return ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Clear the data ready for next reception */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+ /* Freeze the IN pipe after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Clears the stall condition in the attached device on the nominated endpoint number.
+ *
+ * \param EndpointNum Endpoint number in the attached device whose stall condition is to be cleared
+ *
+ * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum)
+{
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT),
+ .bRequest = REQ_ClearFeature,
+ .wValue = FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT,
+ .wIndex = EndpointNum,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to reset the attached device's Mass Storage interface,
+ * readying the device for the next CBW.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void)
+{
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_MassStorageReset,
+ .wValue = 0,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Issues a Mass Storage class specific request to determine the index of the highest numbered Logical
+ * Unit in the attached device.
+ *
+ * \param MaxLUNIndex Pointer to the location that the maximum LUN index value should be stored
+ *
+ * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_GetMaxLUN,
+ .wValue = 0,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 1,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(MaxLUNIndex)) == HOST_SENDCONTROL_SetupStalled)
+ {
+ /* Clear the pipe stall */
+ Pipe_ClearStall();
+
+ /* Some faulty Mass Storage devices don't implement the GET_MAX_LUN request, so assume a single LUN */
+ *MaxLUNIndex = 0;
+ }
+
+ return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Request Sense command to the attached device, to determine the current SCSI sense information. This
+ * gives error codes for the last issued SCSI command to the device.
+ *
+ * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ * \param SensePtr Pointer to the sense data structure where the sense data from the device is to be stored
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr)
+{
+ uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+ /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue REQUEST SENSE command */
+ SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+ {
+ .Header =
+ {
+ .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+ .Tag = MassStore_Tag,
+ .DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t),
+ .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+ .LUN = LUNIndex,
+ .SCSICommandLength = 6
+ },
+
+ .SCSICommandData =
+ {
+ SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE,
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ sizeof(SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t), // Allocation Length
+ 0x00 // Unused (control)
+ }
+ };
+
+ /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */
+ MassStore_SendCommand();
+
+ /* Wait until data received from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ /* Read the returned sense data into the buffer */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData((uint8_t*)SensePtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Read command to the attached device, to read in one or more data blocks from the
+ * storage medium into a buffer.
+ *
+ * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ * \param BlockAddress Start block address to read from
+ * \param Blocks Number of blocks to read from the device
+ * \param BlockSize Size in bytes of each block to read
+ * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer where the read data is to be written to
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+ const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr)
+{
+ uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+ /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to read in the given blocks from the device */
+ SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+ {
+ .Header =
+ {
+ .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+ .Tag = MassStore_Tag,
+ .DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+ .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+ .LUN = LUNIndex,
+ .SCSICommandLength = 10
+ },
+
+ .SCSICommandData =
+ {
+ SCSI_CMD_READ_10,
+ 0x00, // Unused (control bits, all off)
+ (BlockAddress >> 24), // MSB of Block Address
+ (BlockAddress >> 16),
+ (BlockAddress >> 8),
+ (BlockAddress & 0xFF), // LSB of Block Address
+ 0x00, // Unused (reserved)
+ 0x00, // MSB of Total Blocks to Read
+ Blocks, // LSB of Total Blocks to Read
+ 0x00 // Unused (control)
+ }
+ };
+
+ /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */
+ MassStore_SendCommand();
+
+ /* Wait until data received from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ /* Read the returned block data into the buffer */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Block Write command to the attached device, to write one or more data blocks to the
+ * storage medium from a buffer.
+ *
+ * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ * \param BlockAddress Start block address to write to
+ * \param Blocks Number of blocks to write to in the device
+ * \param BlockSize Size in bytes of each block to write
+ * \param BufferPtr Pointer to the buffer where the write data is to be sourced from
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+ const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr)
+{
+ uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+ /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to write the given blocks to the device */
+ SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+ {
+ .Header =
+ {
+ .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+ .Tag = MassStore_Tag,
+ .DataTransferLength = ((uint32_t)Blocks * BlockSize),
+ .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
+ .LUN = LUNIndex,
+ .SCSICommandLength = 10
+ },
+
+ .SCSICommandData =
+ {
+ SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10,
+ 0x00, // Unused (control bits, all off)
+ (BlockAddress >> 24), // MSB of Block Address
+ (BlockAddress >> 16),
+ (BlockAddress >> 8),
+ (BlockAddress & 0xFF), // LSB of Block Address
+ 0x00, // Unused (reserved)
+ 0x00, // MSB of Total Blocks to Write
+ Blocks, // LSB of Total Blocks to Write
+ 0x00 // Unused (control)
+ }
+ };
+
+ /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */
+ MassStore_SendCommand();
+
+ /* Write the data to the device from the buffer */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(BufferPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Test Unit Ready command to the attached device, to determine if the device is ready to accept
+ * other commands.
+ *
+ * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex)
+{
+ uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+ /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue TEST UNIT READY command */
+ SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+ {
+ .Header =
+ {
+ .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+ .Tag = MassStore_Tag,
+ .DataTransferLength = 0,
+ .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+ .LUN = LUNIndex,
+ .SCSICommandLength = 6
+ },
+
+ .SCSICommandData =
+ {
+ SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY,
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00 // Unused (control)
+ }
+ };
+
+ /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */
+ MassStore_SendCommand();
+
+ /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Read Capacity command to the attached device, to determine the capacity of the
+ * given Logical Unit within the device.
+ *
+ * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ * \param CapacityPtr Device capacity structure where the capacity data is to be stored
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr)
+{
+ uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+ /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue READ CAPACITY command */
+ SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+ {
+ .Header =
+ {
+ .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+ .Tag = MassStore_Tag,
+ .DataTransferLength = sizeof(SCSI_Capacity_t),
+ .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN,
+ .LUN = LUNIndex,
+ .SCSICommandLength = 10
+ },
+
+ .SCSICommandData =
+ {
+ SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10,
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // MSB of Logical block address
+ 0x00,
+ 0x00,
+ 0x00, // LSB of Logical block address
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // Partial Medium Indicator
+ 0x00 // Unused (control)
+ }
+ };
+
+ /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */
+ MassStore_SendCommand();
+
+ /* Wait until data received from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_WaitForDataReceived()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ /* Read the returned capacity data into the buffer */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_SendReceiveData(CapacityPtr)) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ /* Endian-correct the read data */
+ CapacityPtr->Blocks = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->Blocks);
+ CapacityPtr->BlockSize = SwapEndian_32(CapacityPtr->BlockSize);
+
+ /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Issues a SCSI Device Prevent/Allow Medium Removal command to the attached device, to lock the physical media from
+ * being removed. This is a legacy command for SCSI disks with removable storage (such as ZIP disks), but should still
+ * be issued before the first read or write command is sent.
+ *
+ * \param LUNIndex Index of the LUN inside the device the command is being addressed to
+ * \param PreventRemoval Whether or not the LUN media should be locked to prevent removal or not
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval)
+{
+ uint8_t ReturnCode = PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+
+ /* Create a CBW with a SCSI command to issue PREVENT ALLOW MEDIUM REMOVAL command */
+ SCSICommandBlock = (CommandBlockWrapper_t)
+ {
+ .Header =
+ {
+ .Signature = CBW_SIGNATURE,
+ .Tag = MassStore_Tag,
+ .DataTransferLength = 0,
+ .Flags = COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT,
+ .LUN = LUNIndex,
+ .SCSICommandLength = 6
+ },
+
+ .SCSICommandData =
+ {
+ SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL,
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ PreventRemoval, // Prevent flag
+ 0x00, // Reserved
+ 0x00 // Unused (control)
+ }
+ };
+
+ /* Send SCSI command to the attached device */
+ MassStore_SendCommand();
+
+ /* Read in the returned CSW from the device */
+ if ((ReturnCode = MassStore_GetReturnedStatus()))
+ {
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ return ReturnCode;
+ }
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e939f1c86
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/MassStoreCommands.h
@@ -0,0 +1,175 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for MassStoreCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _MASS_STORE_COMMANDS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+
+ #include "MassStorageHost.h"
+ #include "SCSI_Codes.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Class specific request to reset the Mass Storage interface of the attached device */
+ #define REQ_MassStorageReset 0xFF
+
+ /** Class specific request to retrieve the maximum Logical Unit Number (LUN) index of the attached device */
+ #define REQ_GetMaxLUN 0xFE
+
+ /** Command Block Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CBW blocks */
+ #define CBW_SIGNATURE 0x43425355UL
+
+ /** Command Static Wrapper signature byte, for verification of valid CSW blocks */
+ #define CSW_SIGNATURE 0x53425355UL
+
+ /** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Host-to-Device transfer direction */
+ #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_OUT (0 << 7)
+
+ /** Data direction mask for the Flags field of a CBW, indicating Device-to-Host transfer direction */
+ #define COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_IN (1 << 7)
+
+ /** Timeout period between the issuing of a CBW to a device, and the reception of the first packet */
+ #define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS 2000
+
+ /** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data IN pipe */
+ #define MASS_STORE_DATA_IN_PIPE 1
+
+ /** Pipe number of the Mass Storage data OUT pipe */
+ #define MASS_STORE_DATA_OUT_PIPE 2
+
+ /* Type defines: */
+ /** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Block Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI
+ * commands for transport over the USB bulk endpoints to the device.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ struct
+ {
+ uint32_t Signature; /**< Command block signature, always equal to CBW_SIGNATURE */
+ uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */
+ uint32_t DataTransferLength; /**< Length of data to transfer, following the CBW */
+ uint8_t Flags; /**< Block flags, equal to one of the COMMAND_DIRECTION_DATA_* macros */
+ uint8_t LUN; /**< Logical Unit Number the CBW is addressed to in the device */
+ uint8_t SCSICommandLength; /**< Length of the SCSI command in the CBW */
+ } Header;
+
+ uint8_t SCSICommandData[16]; /**< SCSI command to issue to the device */
+ } CommandBlockWrapper_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a Mass Storage class Command Status Wrapper, used to wrap SCSI
+ * responses for transport over the USB bulk endpoints from the device.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t Signature; /**< Command status signature, always equal to CSW_SIGNATURE */
+ uint32_t Tag; /**< Current CBW tag, to positively associate a CBW with a CSW */
+ uint32_t DataTransferResidue; /**< Length of data not transferred */
+ uint8_t Status; /**< Command status, a value from the MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t enum */
+ } CommandStatusWrapper_t;
+
+ /** Type define for a SCSI Sense structure. Structures of this type are filled out by the
+ * device via the MassStore_RequestSense() function, indicating the current sense data of the
+ * device (giving explicit error codes for the last issued command). For details of the
+ * structure contents, refer to the SCSI specifications.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t ReponseCode;
+
+ uint8_t SegmentNumber;
+
+ unsigned char SenseKey : 4;
+ unsigned char _RESERVED1 : 1;
+ unsigned char ILI : 1;
+ unsigned char EOM : 1;
+ unsigned char FileMark : 1;
+
+ uint8_t Information[4];
+ uint8_t AdditionalLength;
+ uint8_t CmdSpecificInformation[4];
+ uint8_t AdditionalSenseCode;
+ uint8_t AdditionalSenseQualifier;
+ uint8_t FieldReplaceableUnitCode;
+ uint8_t SenseKeySpecific[3];
+ } SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t;
+
+ /** SCSI capacity structure, to hold the total capacity of the device in both the number
+ * of blocks in the current LUN, and the size of each block. This structure is filled by
+ * the device when the MassStore_ReadCapacity() function is called.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t Blocks; /**< Number of blocks in the addressed LUN of the device */
+ uint32_t BlockSize; /**< Number of bytes in each block in the addressed LUN */
+ } SCSI_Capacity_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** CSW status return codes, indicating the overall status of the issued CBW */
+ enum MassStorageHost_CommandStatusCodes_t
+ {
+ Command_Pass = 0, /**< Command completed successfully */
+ Command_Fail = 1, /**< Command failed to complete successfully */
+ Phase_Error = 2 /**< Phase error while processing the issued command */
+ };
+
+ /* External Variables: */
+ extern CommandStatusWrapper_t SCSICommandStatus;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ #if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_MASSSTORE_COMMANDS_C)
+ static uint8_t MassStore_SendCommand(void);
+ static uint8_t MassStore_WaitForDataReceived(void);
+ static uint8_t MassStore_SendReceiveData(void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+ static uint8_t MassStore_GetReturnedStatus(void);
+ #endif
+
+ uint8_t MassStore_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum);
+ uint8_t MassStore_MassStorageReset(void);
+ uint8_t MassStore_GetMaxLUN(uint8_t* const MaxLUNIndex);
+ uint8_t MassStore_RequestSense(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t* const SensePtr)
+ ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+ uint8_t MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+ const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
+ uint8_t MassStore_WriteDeviceBlock(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+ const uint8_t Blocks, const uint16_t BlockSize, void* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(5);
+ uint8_t MassStore_ReadCapacity(const uint8_t LUNIndex, SCSI_Capacity_t* const CapacityPtr)
+ ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(2);
+ uint8_t MassStore_TestUnitReady(const uint8_t LUNIndex);
+ uint8_t MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(const uint8_t LUNIndex, const bool PreventRemoval);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..2b2213de2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/Lib/SCSI_Codes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header containing macros for possible SCSI commands and SENSE data. Refer to
+ * the SCSI standard documentation for more information on each SCSI command and
+ * the SENSE data.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_CODES_H_
+#define _SCSI_CODES_H_
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ #define SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY 0x12
+ #define SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE 0x03
+ #define SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY 0x00
+ #define SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10 0x25
+ #define SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC 0x1D
+ #define SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL 0x1E
+ #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10 0x2A
+ #define SCSI_CMD_READ_10 0x28
+ #define SCSI_CMD_WRITE_6 0x0A
+ #define SCSI_CMD_READ_6 0x08
+ #define SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10 0x2F
+ #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6 0x1A
+ #define SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_10 0x5A
+
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD 0x00
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_RECOVERED_ERROR 0x01
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_NOT_READY 0x02
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MEDIUM_ERROR 0x03
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR 0x04
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST 0x05
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_UNIT_ATTENTION 0x06
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT 0x07
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_BLANK_CHECK 0x08
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VENDOR_SPECIFIC 0x09
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_COPY_ABORTED 0x0A
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ABORTED_COMMAND 0x0B
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_VOLUME_OVERFLOW 0x0D
+ #define SCSI_SENSE_KEY_MISCOMPARE 0x0E
+
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION 0x00
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_UNIT_NOT_READY 0x04
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB 0x24
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED 0x27
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_FORMAT_ERROR 0x31
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND 0x20
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE 0x21
+ #define SCSI_ASENSE_MEDIUM_NOT_PRESENT 0x3A
+
+ #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER 0x00
+ #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_FORMAT_COMMAND_FAILED 0x01
+ #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_INITIALIZING_COMMAND_REQUIRED 0x02
+ #define SCSI_ASENSEQ_OPERATION_IN_PROGRESS 0x07
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..354a75fc7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,380 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the MassStorageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MassStorageHost.h"
+
+/* Globals */
+/** Index of the highest available LUN (Logical Unit) in the attached Mass Storage Device */
+uint8_t MassStore_MaxLUNIndex;
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ SetupHardware();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY
+ "Mass Storage Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF));
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ MassStorage_Task();
+ USB_USBTask();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+ LEDs_Init();
+ Buttons_Init();
+ USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ * stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ USB_ShutDown();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ * enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read in blocks from
+ * the device and print them to the serial port.
+ */
+void MassStorage_Task(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ switch (USB_HostState)
+ {
+ case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+ .wValue = 1,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+ puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+ if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+ {
+ if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+ else
+ puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Mass Storage Disk Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Ready:
+ /* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_GetMaxLUN(&MassStore_MaxLUNIndex)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Get Max LUN"), false, ErrorCode);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Print number of LUNs detected in the attached device */
+ printf_P(PSTR("Total LUNs: %d.\r\n"), (MassStore_MaxLUNIndex + 1));
+
+ /* Reset the Mass Storage device interface, ready for use */
+ if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_MassStorageReset()) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Mass Storage Reset"), false, ErrorCode);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Get sense data from the device - many devices will not accept any other commands until the sense data
+ * is read - both on start-up and after a failed command */
+ SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData;
+ if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_RequestSense(0, &SenseData)) != 0) || (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass))
+ {
+ ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Request Sense"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Set the prevent removal flag for the device, allowing it to be accessed */
+ if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_PreventAllowMediumRemoval(0, true)) != 0) || (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass))
+ {
+ ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Prevent/Allow Medium Removal"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Waiting until ready.."));
+
+ /* Wait until disk ready */
+ do
+ {
+ Serial_TxByte('.');
+
+ if ((ErrorCode = MassStore_TestUnitReady(0)) != 0)
+ {
+ ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Test Unit Ready"), false, ErrorCode);
+ break;
+ }
+ }
+ while ((SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass) && USB_IsConnected);
+
+ /* Abort if device removed */
+ if (!(USB_IsConnected))
+ break;
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\nRetrieving Capacity... "));
+
+ /* Create new structure for the disk's capacity in blocks and block size */
+ SCSI_Capacity_t DiskCapacity;
+
+ /* Retrieve disk capacity */
+ if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadCapacity(0, &DiskCapacity)) != 0) || (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass))
+ {
+ ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Capacity"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Display the disk capacity in blocks * block size bytes */
+ printf_P(PSTR("%lu blocks of %lu bytes.\r\n"), DiskCapacity.Blocks, DiskCapacity.BlockSize);
+
+ /* Create a new buffer capabable of holding a single block from the device */
+ uint8_t BlockBuffer[DiskCapacity.BlockSize];
+
+ /* Read in the first 512 byte block from the device */
+ if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, 0x00000000, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0) ||
+ (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass))
+ {
+ ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\nContents of first block:\r\n"));
+
+ /* Print out the first block in both HEX and ASCII, 16 bytes per line */
+ for (uint16_t Chunk = 0; Chunk < (DiskCapacity.BlockSize >> 4); Chunk++)
+ {
+ /* Pointer to the start of the current 16-byte chunk in the read block of data */
+ uint8_t* ChunkPtr = &BlockBuffer[Chunk << 4];
+
+ /* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in HEX format */
+ for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+ {
+ char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+
+ printf_P(PSTR("%.2X "), CurrByte);
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(" "));
+
+ /* Print out the 16 bytes of the chunk in ASCII format */
+ for (uint8_t ByteOffset = 0; ByteOffset < (1 << 4); ByteOffset++)
+ {
+ char CurrByte = *(ChunkPtr + ByteOffset);
+
+ putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\n"));
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nPress board button to read entire ASCII contents of disk...\r\n\r\n"));
+
+ /* Wait for the board button to be pressed */
+ while (!(Buttons_GetStatus() & BUTTONS_BUTTON1))
+ {
+ /* Abort if device removed */
+ if (!(USB_IsConnected))
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Print out the entire disk contents in ASCII format */
+ for (uint32_t CurrBlock = 0; CurrBlock < DiskCapacity.Blocks; CurrBlock++)
+ {
+ /* Read in the next block of data from the device */
+ if (((ErrorCode = MassStore_ReadDeviceBlock(0, CurrBlock, 1, DiskCapacity.BlockSize, BlockBuffer)) != 0) ||
+ (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass))
+ {
+ ShowDiskReadError(PSTR("Read Device Block"), (SCSICommandStatus.Status != Command_Pass), ErrorCode);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Send the ASCII data in the read in block to the serial port */
+ for (uint16_t Byte = 0; Byte < DiskCapacity.BlockSize; Byte++)
+ {
+ char CurrByte = BlockBuffer[Byte];
+
+ putchar(isprint(CurrByte) ? CurrByte : '.');
+ }
+
+ /* Abort if device removed */
+ if (!(USB_IsConnected))
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Indicate device no longer busy */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Indicates that a communication error has occurred with the attached Mass Storage Device,
+ * printing error codes to the serial port and waiting until the device is removed before
+ * continuing.
+ *
+ * \param CommandString ASCII string located in PROGMEM space indicating what operation failed
+ * \param FailedAtSCSILayer Indicates if the command failed at the (logical) SCSI layer or at the physical USB layer
+ * \param ErrorCode Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully
+ */
+void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, bool FailedAtSCSILayer, uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ if (FailedAtSCSILayer)
+ {
+ /* Display the error code */
+ printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "SCSI command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Status Code: %d"), ErrorCode);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Display the error code */
+ printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Command error (%S).\r\n"), CommandString);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d"), ErrorCode);
+ }
+
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ /* Indicate device error via the status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a299b7008
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for MassStoreHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+#define _MASS_STORE_HOST_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <ctype.h>
+
+ #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+ #include "Lib/MassStoreCommands.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h> // Library Version Information
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h> // ANSI Terminal Escape Codes
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h> // Serial stream driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h> // LEDs driver
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h> // Board Buttons driver
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY (LEDS_LED2)
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void MassStorage_Task(void);
+ void SetupHardware(void);
+
+ void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+ void ShowDiskReadError(char* CommandString, bool FailedAtSCSILayer, uint8_t ErrorCode);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..88b42e937
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/MassStorageHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mass Storage Host Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Host</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Mass Storage Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>Bulk Only</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard</td>
+ * <td>USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard</td>
+ * <td>SCSI Primary Commands Specification</td>
+ * <td>SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Mass Storage host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB Mass Storage host, for USB storage devices
+ * using the standard Mass Storage USB profile.
+ *
+ * The first 512 bytes (boot sector) of an attached disk's memory will be dumped
+ * out of the serial port in HEX and ASCII form when it is attached to the AT90USB1287
+ * AVR. The device will then wait for HWB to be pressed, whereupon the entire ASCII contents
+ * of the disk will be dumped to the serial port.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..709f42f61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MassStorageHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,735 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MassStorageHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ Lib/MassStoreCommands.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+CDEFS += -DUSB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS=2000
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0f6ab59ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,155 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
+ * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ * with compatible devices.
+ *
+ * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return An error code from the MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+ uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData;
+ uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+
+ /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */
+ if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ControlError;
+
+ /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */
+ if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE)
+ return DescriptorTooLarge;
+
+ /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */
+ ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize);
+
+ /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+ USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData);
+
+ /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+ return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+
+ /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoEndpointFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+ /* Configure the mouse data pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+ /* Valid data found, return success */
+ return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ /* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+ if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL))
+ {
+ /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ /* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+ {
+ /* Check if the current Endpoint descriptor is of type IN */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ {
+ /* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+ else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+ }
+
+ /* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cb1ae63ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "MouseHost.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+ #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03
+
+ /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */
+ #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02
+
+ /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */
+ #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+ enum MouseHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+ {
+ SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+ ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+ DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+ InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+ };
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+ uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5194af375
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9b4db3086
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,283 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the MouseHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MouseHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ SetupHardware();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY
+ "Mouse HID Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF));
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ Mouse_HID_Task();
+ USB_USBTask();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+ LEDs_Init();
+ USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ * stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ USB_ShutDown();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ * enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and processes the next report from the attached device, displaying the report
+ * contents on the board LEDs and via the serial port.
+ */
+void ReadNextReport(void)
+{
+ USB_MouseReport_Data_t MouseReport;
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Select mouse data pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE);
+
+ /* Unfreeze keyboard data pipe */
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+ if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+ {
+ /* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return;
+ }
+
+ /* Ensure pipe contains data before trying to read from it */
+ if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Read in mouse report data */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&MouseReport, sizeof(MouseReport));
+
+ /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse X movement */
+ if (MouseReport.X > 0)
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED1;
+ else if (MouseReport.X < 0)
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED2;
+
+ /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse Y movement */
+ if (MouseReport.Y > 0)
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED3;
+ else if (MouseReport.Y < 0)
+ LEDMask |= LEDS_LED4;
+
+ /* Alter status LEDs according to mouse button position */
+ if (MouseReport.Button)
+ LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+
+ /* Print mouse report data through the serial port */
+ printf_P(PSTR("dX:%2d dY:%2d Button:%d\r\n"), MouseReport.X,
+ MouseReport.Y,
+ MouseReport.Button);
+ }
+
+ /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+ /* Refreeze mouse data pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ * HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
+ switch (USB_HostState)
+ {
+ case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+ .wValue = 1,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+ puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+ if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+ {
+ if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+ else
+ puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* HID class request to set the mouse protocol to the Boot Protocol */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetProtocol,
+ .wValue = 0,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Protocol).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error status */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Ready:
+ /* If a report has been received, read and process it */
+ ReadNextReport();
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1abd56068
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for MouseHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+ #include <avr/interrupt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+ #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Pipe number for the mouse data IN pipe */
+ #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1
+
+ /** HID Class Specific request to set the report protocol mode */
+ #define REQ_SetProtocol 0x0B
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a standard Boot Protocol Mouse report */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint8_t Button; /**< Button mask for currently pressed buttons in the mouse */
+ int8_t X; /**< Current delta X movement of the mouse */
+ int8_t Y; /**< Current delta Y movement on the mouse */
+ } USB_MouseReport_Data_t;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
+ void SetupHardware(void);
+
+ void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+ void ReadNextReport(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3838a7011
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/MouseHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Host</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ * the standard mouse HID profile.
+ *
+ * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs,
+ * as well as printed out the serial terminal as formatted dY, dY and
+ * button status information.
+ *
+ * This uses a naive method where the mouse is set to Boot Protocol mode, so
+ * that the report structure is fixed and known. A better implementation
+ * uses the HID report parser for correct report data processing across
+ * all compatible mice with advanced characteristics, as shown in the
+ * MouseHostWithParser demo application.
+ *
+ * Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..67e05a63a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,732 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MouseHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d9d3f04e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
+ * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ * with compatible devices.
+ *
+ * This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint and HID descriptor.
+ *
+ * \return An error code from the MouseHostWithParser_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+ uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData;
+ uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+
+ /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */
+ if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ControlError;
+
+ /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */
+ if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE)
+ return DescriptorTooLarge;
+
+ /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */
+ ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize);
+
+ /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+ USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData);
+
+ /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+ return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+
+ /* Get the mouse interface from the configuration descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextMouseInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoHIDInterfaceFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the mouse interface's HID descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextHID) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoHIDDescriptorFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Save the HID report size for later use */
+ HIDReportSize = DESCRIPTOR_CAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_HID_t).HIDReportLength;
+
+ /* Get the mouse interface's data endpoint descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoEndpointFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+ /* Configure the mouse data pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize, PIPE_BANK_SINGLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+ /* Valid data found, return success */
+ return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Mouse HID Class and Protocol values.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+ if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == MOUSE_CLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == MOUSE_PROTOCOL))
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next IN Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ * aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+ {
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next HID descriptor within the current HID interface descriptor.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_HID)
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ else
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..08400c50f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "HIDReport.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class */
+ #define MOUSE_CLASS 0x03
+
+ /** Interface Protocol value for a Boot Protocol Mouse compliant device */
+ #define MOUSE_PROTOCOL 0x02
+
+ /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */
+ #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512
+
+ /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID descriptor */
+ #define DTYPE_HID 0x21
+
+ /** Descriptor header type constant for a HID report descriptor */
+ #define DTYPE_Report 0x22
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+ enum CDCHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+ {
+ SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+ ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+ DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+ InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoHIDInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible HID interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoHIDDescriptorFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID descriptor was not found in the device's HID interface */
+ NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< A compatible HID IN endpoint was not found in the device's HID interface */
+ };
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+ uint8_t DComp_NextMouseInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextInterfaceMouseDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextHID(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f3f45e313
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Mouse Host (Using Mouse Descriptor Parser)"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4d895908e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.c
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HIDReport.h"
+
+/** Size in bytes of the attached device's HID report descriptor */
+uint16_t HIDReportSize;
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+
+/** Function to read in the HID report descriptor from the attached device, and process it into easy-to-read
+ * structures via the HID parser routines in the LUFA library.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void)
+{
+ /* Create a buffer big enough to hold the entire returned HID report */
+ uint8_t HIDReportData[HIDReportSize];
+
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_GetDescriptor,
+ .wValue = (DTYPE_Report << 8),
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = HIDReportSize,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send control request to retrieve the HID report from the attached device */
+ if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(HIDReportData) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ParseControlError;
+
+ /* Send the HID report to the parser for processing */
+ if (USB_ProcessHIDReport(HIDReportData, HIDReportSize, &HIDReportInfo) != HID_PARSE_Successful)
+ return ParseError;
+
+ return ParseSuccessful;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f5429f0a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/HIDReport.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for HIDReport.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.h>
+
+ #include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a toggle button */
+ #define USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON 0x09
+
+ /** HID Report Descriptor Usage Page value for a Generic Desktop Control */
+ #define USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL 0x01
+
+ /** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a X axis movement */
+ #define USAGE_X 0x30
+
+ /** HID Report Descriptor Usage value for a Y axis movement */
+ #define USAGE_Y 0x31
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the GetHIDReportData() function. */
+ enum MouseHostWithParser_GetHIDReportDataCodes_t
+ {
+ ParseSuccessful = 0, /**< HID report descriptor parsed successfully */
+ ParseError = 1, /**< Failed to fully process the HID report descriptor */
+ ParseControlError = 2, /**< Control error occurred while trying to read the device HID descriptor */
+ };
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a HID descriptor. */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ USB_Descriptor_Header_t Header; /**< Regular descriptor header containing the descriptor's type and length */
+
+ uint16_t HIDSpec; /**< Implemented HID class specification, in BCD encoded format */
+ uint8_t CountryCode; /**< Country code value for localized hardware */
+
+ uint8_t TotalHIDDescriptors; /**< Total number of HID report descriptors in the current interface */
+
+ uint8_t HIDReportType; /**< HID report type of the first HID report descriptor */
+ uint16_t HIDReportLength; /**< Total size in bytes of the first HID report descriptor */
+ } USB_Descriptor_HID_t;
+
+ /* External Variables: */
+ extern uint16_t HIDReportSize;
+ extern HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t GetHIDReportData(void);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3ef5503b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.c
@@ -0,0 +1,305 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the MouseHostWithParser demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MouseHostWithParser.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ SetupHardware();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY
+ "Mouse HID Parser Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF));
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ Mouse_HID_Task();
+ USB_USBTask();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable clock division */
+ clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+ LEDs_Init();
+ USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ * stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Unattached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ USB_ShutDown();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ * enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to read and process
+ * the HID report descriptor and HID reports from the device and display the results onto the board LEDs.
+ */
+void Mouse_HID_Task(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Switch to determine what user-application handled host state the host state machine is in */
+ switch (USB_HostState)
+ {
+ case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+ .wValue = 1,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if ((ErrorCode = USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Set Configuration).\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+ puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+ if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+ {
+ if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+ else
+ puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Processing HID Report.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the device's first HID report descriptor */
+ if ((ErrorCode = GetHIDReportData()) != ParseSuccessful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Report Parse Error.\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Mouse Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Ready:
+ /* Select and unfreeze mouse data pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(MOUSE_DATAPIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+ if (Pipe_IsINReceived())
+ {
+ /* Check if data has been received from the attached mouse */
+ if (Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed())
+ {
+ /* Create buffer big enough for the report */
+ uint8_t MouseReport[Pipe_BytesInPipe()];
+
+ /* Load in the mouse report */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(MouseReport, Pipe_BytesInPipe());
+
+ /* Process the read in mouse report from the device */
+ ProcessMouseReport(MouseReport);
+ }
+
+ /* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+ }
+
+ /* Freeze mouse data pipe */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Processes a read HID report from an attached mouse, extracting out elements via the HID parser results
+ * as required and displays movement and button presses on the board LEDs.
+ *
+ * \param MouseReport Pointer to a HID report from an attached mouse device
+ */
+void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport)
+{
+ uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_NO_LEDS;
+
+ /* Check each HID report item in turn, looking for mouse X/Y/button reports */
+ for (uint8_t ReportNumber = 0; ReportNumber < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ReportNumber++)
+ {
+ /* Create a temporary item pointer to the next report item */
+ HID_ReportItem_t* ReportItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ReportNumber];
+
+ bool FoundData;
+
+ if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_BUTTON) &&
+ (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+ {
+ /* Get the mouse button value */
+ FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem);
+
+ /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+ if (!(FoundData))
+ continue;
+
+ /* If button is pressed, all LEDs are turned on */
+ if (ReportItem->Value)
+ LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+ }
+ else if ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Page == USAGE_PAGE_GENERIC_DCTRL) &&
+ ((ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X) ||
+ (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_Y)) &&
+ (ReportItem->ItemType == REPORT_ITEM_TYPE_In))
+ {
+ /* Get the mouse relative position value */
+ FoundData = USB_GetHIDReportItemInfo(MouseReport, ReportItem);
+
+ /* For multi-report devices - if the requested data was not in the issued report, continue */
+ if (!(FoundData))
+ continue;
+
+ int16_t DeltaMovement;
+
+ if (ReportItem->Attributes.BitSize > 8)
+ DeltaMovement = (int16_t)ReportItem->Value;
+ else
+ DeltaMovement = (int8_t)ReportItem->Value;
+
+ /* Determine if the report is for the X or Y delta movement */
+ if (ReportItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage == USAGE_X)
+ {
+ /* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
+ if (DeltaMovement)
+ LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED1 : LEDS_LED2);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Turn on the appropriate LED according to direction if the delta is non-zero */
+ if (DeltaMovement)
+ LEDMask |= ((DeltaMovement > 0) ? LEDS_LED3 : LEDS_LED4);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Display the button information on the board LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b91d6d1a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.h
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+#ifndef _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+#define _MOUSE_HOST_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ #include <LUFA/Version.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+ #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+ #include "HIDReport.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Pipe number for the mouse report data pipe */
+ #define MOUSE_DATAPIPE 1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void Mouse_HID_Task(void);
+ void SetupHardware(void);
+
+ void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+ void ProcessMouseReport(uint8_t* MouseReport);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3c83341a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/MouseHostWithParser.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Mouse Host With HID Descriptor Parser Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Host</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Mouse host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a USB Mouse host, for USB mice using
+ * the standard mouse HID profile. It uses a HID parser for the HID
+ * reports, allowing for correct operation across all USB mice. This
+ * demo supports mice with a single HID report.
+ *
+ * Mouse movement and button presses are displayed on the board LEDs.
+ * On connection to a USB mouse, the report items will be processed and
+ * printed as a formatted list through the USART before the mouse is
+ * fully enumerated.
+ *
+ * Currently only single interface mice are supported.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..30e40ad45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/MouseHostWithParser/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,735 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = MouseHostWithParser
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ HIDReport.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/Class/Host/HIDParser.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..108496964
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,192 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ * needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special computer-readable structures
+ * which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ * routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ * with compatible devices.
+ *
+ * This routine searches for a SI interface descriptor containing bulk IN and OUT data endpoints.
+ *
+ * \return An error code from the StillImageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+ uint8_t* ConfigDescriptorData;
+ uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+ uint8_t FoundEndpoints = 0;
+
+ /* Get Configuration Descriptor size from the device */
+ if (USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ return ControlError;
+
+ /* Ensure that the Configuration Descriptor isn't too large */
+ if (ConfigDescriptorSize > MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE)
+ return DescriptorTooLarge;
+
+ /* Allocate enough memory for the entire config descriptor */
+ ConfigDescriptorData = alloca(ConfigDescriptorSize);
+
+ /* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+ USB_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(&ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData);
+
+ /* Validate returned data - ensure first entry is a configuration header descriptor */
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(ConfigDescriptorData) != DTYPE_Configuration)
+ return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+
+ /* Get the Still Image interface from the configuration descriptor */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextStillImageInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoInterfaceFound;
+ }
+
+ /* Get the IN and OUT data and event endpoints for the Still Image interface */
+ while (FoundEndpoints != ((1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE) | (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE)))
+ {
+ /* Fetch the next endpoint from the current Still Image interface */
+ if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&ConfigDescriptorSize, &ConfigDescriptorData,
+ DComp_NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+ {
+ /* Descriptor not found, error out */
+ return NoEndpointFound;
+ }
+
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(ConfigDescriptorData, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+ /* Check if the found endpoint is a interrupt or bulk type descriptor */
+ if ((EndpointData->Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK) == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT)
+ {
+ /* If the endpoint is a IN type interrupt endpoint */
+ if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ {
+ /* Configure the events pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+ PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+ Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(EndpointData->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+ /* Set the flag indicating that the events pipe has been found */
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
+ }
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Check if the endpoint is a bulk IN or bulk OUT endpoint */
+ if (EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DESCRIPTOR_DIR_IN)
+ {
+ /* Configure the data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_IN,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+ PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ Pipe_SetInfiniteINRequests();
+
+ /* Set the flag indicating that the data IN pipe has been found */
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ }
+ else
+ {
+ /* Configure the data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_ConfigurePipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_BULK, PIPE_TOKEN_OUT,
+ EndpointData->EndpointAddress, EndpointData->EndpointSize,
+ PIPE_BANK_DOUBLE);
+
+ /* Set the flag indicating that the data OUT pipe has been found */
+ FoundEndpoints |= (1 << SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ /* Valid data found, return success */
+ return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct Still Image Class, Subclass and Protocol values.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ /* Check the descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+ if ((DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Class == SIMAGE_CLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).SubClass == SIMAGE_SUBCLASS) &&
+ (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t).Protocol == SIMAGE_PROTOCOL))
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ * configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ * descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ * This comparator searches for the next Interrupt or Bulk Endpoint descriptor of the current SI interface, aborting the
+ * search if another interface descriptor is found before the next endpoint.
+ *
+ * \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+ if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+ {
+ uint8_t EndpointType = (DESCRIPTOR_CAST(CurrentDescriptor,
+ USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t).Attributes & EP_TYPE_MASK);
+
+ if ((EndpointType == EP_TYPE_BULK) || (EndpointType == EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT))
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+ }
+ else if (DESCRIPTOR_TYPE(CurrentDescriptor) == DTYPE_Interface)
+ {
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+ }
+
+ return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..29df30c0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "StillImageHost.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device class */
+ #define SIMAGE_CLASS 0x06
+
+ /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device subclass */
+ #define SIMAGE_SUBCLASS 0x01
+
+ /** Interface Class value for the Still Image Device protocol */
+ #define SIMAGE_PROTOCOL 0x01
+
+ /** Maximum size of a device configuration descriptor which can be processed by the host, in bytes */
+ #define MAX_CONFIG_DESCRIPTOR_SIZE 512
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible return codes of the ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+ enum MassStorageHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+ {
+ SuccessfulConfigRead = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+ ControlError = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+ DescriptorTooLarge = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+ InvalidConfigDataReturned = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoInterfaceFound = 4, /**< A compatible SI interface was not found in the device's Configuration Descriptor */
+ NoEndpointFound = 5, /**< The correct SI endpoint descriptors were not found in the device's SI interface */
+ };
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+ uint8_t DComp_NextStillImageInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+ uint8_t DComp_NextSImageInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d3a494a5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Doxygen.conf
@@ -0,0 +1,1485 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.5.7.1
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project
+#
+# All text after a hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (" ")
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all
+# text before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the
+# iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See
+# http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for the list of possible encodings.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded
+# by quotes) that should identify the project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME = "LUFA Library - Still Image Host Demo"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number.
+# This could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or
+# if some version control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER = 0.0.0
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute)
+# base path where the generated documentation will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered, it will be relative to the location
+# where doxygen was started. If left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create
+# 4096 sub-directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output
+# format and will distribute the generated files over these directories.
+# Enabling this option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of
+# source files, where putting all generated files in the same directory would
+# otherwise cause performance problems for the file system.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS = YES
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# The default language is English, other supported languages are:
+# Afrikaans, Arabic, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese, Chinese-Traditional,
+# Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, Farsi, Finnish, French, German, Greek,
+# Hungarian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en, Lithuanian, Norwegian, Macedonian, Persian, Polish,
+# Portuguese, Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Serbian-Cyrilic, Slovak, Slovene,
+# Spanish, Swedish, and Ukrainian.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# include brief member descriptions after the members that are listed in
+# the file and class documentation (similar to JavaDoc).
+# Set to NO to disable this.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will prepend
+# the brief description of a member or function before the detailed description.
+# Note: if both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator
+# that is used to form the text in various listings. Each string
+# in this list, if found as the leading text of the brief description, will be
+# stripped from the text and the result after processing the whole list, is
+# used as the annotated text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is.
+# If left blank, the following values are used ("$name" is automatically
+# replaced with the name of the entity): "The $name class" "The $name widget"
+# "The $name file" "is" "provides" "specifies" "contains"
+# "represents" "a" "an" "the"
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF = "The $name class" \
+ "The $name widget" \
+ "The $name file" \
+ is \
+ provides \
+ specifies \
+ contains \
+ represents \
+ a \
+ an \
+ the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# Doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then Doxygen will prepend the full
+# path before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set
+# to NO the shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES then the STRIP_FROM_PATH tag
+# can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path. Stripping is
+# only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand part of
+# the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the
+# path to strip.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of
+# the path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells
+# the reader which header file to include in order to use a class.
+# If left blank only the name of the header file containing the class
+# definition is used. Otherwise one should specify the include paths that
+# are normally passed to the compiler using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter
+# (but less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems
+# doesn't support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+
+SHORT_NAMES = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen
+# will interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a JavaDoc-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the JavaDoc
+# comments will behave just like regular Qt-style comments
+# (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief description.)
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then Doxygen will
+# interpret the first line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style
+# comment as the brief description. If set to NO, the comments
+# will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus requiring
+# an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make Doxygen
+# treat a multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or ///
+# comments) as a brief description. This used to be the default behaviour.
+# The new default is to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed
+# description. Set this tag to YES if you prefer the old behaviour instead.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then an undocumented
+# member inherits the documentation from any documented member that it
+# re-implements.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce
+# a new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will
+# be part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab.
+# Doxygen uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+
+TAB_SIZE = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that acts
+# as commands in the documentation. An alias has the form "name=value".
+# For example adding "sideeffect=\par Side Effects:\n" will allow you to
+# put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the documentation, which
+# will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading "Side Effects:".
+# You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert newlines.
+
+ALIASES =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C.
+# For instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list
+# of all members will be omitted, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Java. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages, qualified
+# scopes will look different, etc.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for
+# Fortran.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for
+# VHDL.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL = NO
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should
+# set this tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string); v.s.
+# func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip sources only.
+# Doxygen will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public
+# instead of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate getter
+# and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES (the default)
+# will make doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the
+# documentation. This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or
+# setting a simple type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the
+# methods anyway, you should set this option to NO.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES (the default) to allow class member groups of
+# the same type (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a
+# subgroup of that type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to
+# NO to prevent subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using
+# the \nosubgrouping command.
+
+SUBGROUPING = YES
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or enum
+# is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically
+# be useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT = NO
+
+# The SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE determines the size of the internal cache use to
+# determine which symbols to keep in memory and which to flush to disk.
+# When the cache is full, less often used symbols will be written to disk.
+# For small to medium size projects (<1000 input files) the default value is
+# probably good enough. For larger projects a too small cache size can cause
+# doxygen to be busy swapping symbols to and from disk most of the time
+# causing a significant performance penality.
+# If the system has enough physical memory increasing the cache will improve the
+# performance by keeping more symbols in memory. Note that the value works on
+# a logarithmic scale so increasing the size by one will rougly double the
+# memory usage. The cache size is given by this formula:
+# 2^(16+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range is 0..9, the default is 0,
+# corresponding to a cache size of 2^16 = 65536 symbols
+
+SYMBOL_CACHE_SIZE = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available.
+# Private class members and static file members will be hidden unless
+# the EXTRACT_PRIVATE and EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES
+
+EXTRACT_ALL = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file
+# will be included in the documentation.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs)
+# defined locally in source files will be included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO only classes defined in header files are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local
+# methods, which are defined in the implementation section but not in
+# the interface are included in the documentation.
+# If set to NO (the default) only methods in the interface are included.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base
+# name of the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default
+# anonymous namespace are hidden.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members of documented classes, files or namespaces.
+# If set to NO (the default) these members will be included in the
+# various overviews, but no documentation section is generated.
+# This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy.
+# If set to NO (the default) these classes will be included in the various
+# overviews. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide all
+# friend (class|struct|union) declarations.
+# If set to NO (the default) these declarations will be included in the
+# documentation.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, Doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function.
+# If set to NO (the default) these blocks will be appended to the
+# function's detailed documentation block.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation
+# that is typed after a \internal command is included. If the tag is set
+# to NO (the default) then the documentation will be excluded.
+# Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then Doxygen will only generate
+# file names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO (the default) then Doxygen
+# will show members with their full class and namespace scopes in the
+# documentation. If set to YES the scope will be hidden.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will put a list of the files that are included by a file in the documentation
+# of that file.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES = YES
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES (the default) then a tag [inline]
+# is inserted in the documentation for inline members.
+
+INLINE_INFO = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES (the default) then doxygen
+# will sort the (detailed) documentation of file and class members
+# alphabetically by member name. If set to NO the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# brief documentation of file, namespace and class members alphabetically
+# by member name. If set to NO (the default) the members will appear in
+# declaration order.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# hierarchy of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO (the default)
+# the group names will appear in their defined order.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be
+# sorted by fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to
+# NO (the default), the class list will be sorted only by class name,
+# not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the
+# alphabetical list.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the todo list. This list is created by putting \todo
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the test list. This list is created by putting \test
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the bug list. This list is created by putting \bug
+# commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable (YES) or
+# disable (NO) the deprecated list. This list is created by putting
+# \deprecated commands in the documentation.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional
+# documentation sections, marked by \if sectionname ... \endif.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines
+# the initial value of a variable or define consists of for it to appear in
+# the documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified
+# here it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely.
+# The appearance of the initializer of individual variables and defines in the
+# documentation can be controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer
+# command in the documentation regardless of this setting.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated
+# at the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the
+# list will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES = YES
+
+# If the sources in your project are distributed over multiple directories
+# then setting the SHOW_DIRECTORIES tag to YES will show the directory hierarchy
+# in the documentation. The default is NO.
+
+SHOW_DIRECTORIES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page.
+# This will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the
+# Namespaces page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index
+# and from the Folder Tree View (if specified). The default is YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command <command> <input-file>, where <command> is the value of
+# the FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an input file
+# provided by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output
+# is used as the file version. See the manual for examples.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed by
+# doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated output files
+# in an output format independent way. The create the layout file that represents
+# doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can optionally specify a
+# file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml will be used as the name
+# of the layout file.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated
+# by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+QUIET = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated by doxygen. Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank
+# NO is used.
+
+WARNINGS = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED is set to YES, then doxygen will generate warnings
+# for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag will
+# automatically be disabled.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED = YES
+
+# If WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some
+# parameters in a documented function, or documenting parameters that
+# don't exist or using markup commands wrongly.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be abled to get warnings for
+# functions that are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters
+# or return value. If set to NO (the default) doxygen will only warn about
+# wrong or incomplete parameter documentation, but not about the absence of
+# documentation.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that
+# doxygen can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text
+# tags, which will be replaced by the file and line number from which the
+# warning originated and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain
+# $version, which will be replaced by the version of the file (if it could
+# be obtained via FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+
+WARN_FORMAT = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning
+# and error messages should be written. If left blank the output is written
+# to stderr.
+
+WARN_LOGFILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag can be used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like "myfile.cpp" or
+# directories like "/usr/src/myproject". Separate the files or directories
+# with spaces.
+
+INPUT = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding, which is
+# also the default input encoding. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv built
+# into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv for
+# the list of possible encodings.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank the following patterns are tested:
+# *.c *.cc *.cxx *.cpp *.c++ *.java *.ii *.ixx *.ipp *.i++ *.inl *.h *.hh *.hxx
+# *.hpp *.h++ *.idl *.odl *.cs *.php *.php3 *.inc *.m *.mm *.py *.f90
+
+FILE_PATTERNS = *.h \
+ *.c \
+ *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to turn specify whether or not subdirectories
+# should be searched for input files as well. Possible values are YES and NO.
+# If left blank NO is used.
+
+RECURSIVE = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+
+EXCLUDE =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix filesystem feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories. Note that the wildcards are matched
+# against the file with absolute path, so to exclude all test directories
+# for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS = */LowLevel/USBMode.h
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS = __*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain example code fragments that are included (see
+# the \include command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp
+# and *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left
+# blank all files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude
+# commands irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# Possible values are YES and NO. If left blank NO is used.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or
+# directories that contain image that are included in the documentation (see
+# the \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command <filter> <input-file>, where <filter>
+# is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the name of an
+# input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter program writes
+# to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag will be
+# ignored.
+
+INPUT_FILTER =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form:
+# pattern=filter (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further
+# info on how filters are used. If FILTER_PATTERNS is empty, INPUT_FILTER
+# is applied to all files.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER) will be used to filter the input files when producing source
+# files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will
+# be generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure also
+# VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body
+# of functions and classes directly in the documentation.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES (the default) will instruct
+# doxygen to hide any special comment blocks from generated source code
+# fragments. Normal C and C++ comments will always remain visible.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented
+# functions referencing it will be listed.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES
+# then for each documented function all documented entities
+# called/used by that function will be listed.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES (the default)
+# and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES, then the hyperlinks from
+# functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will
+# link to the source code. Otherwise they will link to the documentstion.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code
+# will point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen
+# built-in source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source
+# tagging system (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You
+# will need version 4.8.6 or higher.
+
+USE_HTAGS = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set to YES (the default) then Doxygen
+# will generate a verbatim copy of the header file for each class for
+# which an include is specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index
+# of all compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project
+# contains a lot of classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX = YES
+
+# If the alphabetical index is enabled (see ALPHABETICAL_INDEX) then
+# the COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns
+# in which this list will be split (can be a number in the range [1..20])
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all
+# classes will be put under the same header in the alphabetical index.
+# The IGNORE_PREFIX tag can be used to specify one or more prefixes that
+# should be ignored while generating the index headers.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate HTML output.
+
+GENERATE_HTML = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `html' will be used as the default path.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for
+# each generated HTML page (for example: .htm,.php,.asp). If it is left blank
+# doxygen will generate files with .html extension.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML header for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+
+HTML_HEADER =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal HTML footer for
+# each generated HTML page. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard footer.
+
+HTML_FOOTER =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading
+# style sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to
+# fine-tune the look of the HTML output. If the tag is left blank doxygen
+# will generate a default style sheet. Note that doxygen will try to copy
+# the style sheet file to the HTML output directory, so don't put your own
+# stylesheet in the HTML output directory as well, or it will be erased!
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET =
+
+# If the HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, the members of classes,
+# files or namespaces will be aligned in HTML using tables. If set to
+# NO a bullet list will be used.
+
+HTML_ALIGN_MEMBERS = YES
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded. For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript and DHTML is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+, Firefox
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, Konqueror, or Safari).
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3
+# integrated development environment, introduced with OSX 10.5 (Leopard).
+# To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a Makefile in the
+# HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in that
+# directory and running "make install" will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find
+# it at startup.
+# See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html for more information.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET = NO
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag determines the name of the
+# feed. A documentation feed provides an umbrella under which multiple
+# documentation sets from a single provider (such as a company or product suite)
+# can be grouped.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# When GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, this tag specifies a string that
+# should uniquely identify the documentation set bundle. This should be a
+# reverse domain-name style string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen
+# will append .docset to the name.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files
+# will be generated that can be used as input for tools like the
+# Microsoft HTML help workshop to generate a compiled HTML help file (.chm)
+# of the generated HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm file. You
+# can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+
+CHM_FILE =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the HHC_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location (absolute path including file name) of
+# the HTML help compiler (hhc.exe). If non-empty doxygen will try to run
+# the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+
+HHC_LOCATION =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the GENERATE_CHI flag
+# controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (YES) or that
+# it should be included in the master .chm file (NO).
+
+GENERATE_CHI = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the CHM_INDEX_ENCODING
+# is used to encode HtmlHelp index (hhk), content (hhc) and project file
+# content.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING =
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES, the BINARY_TOC flag
+# controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (YES) or a
+# normal table of contents (NO) in the .chm file.
+
+BINARY_TOC = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members
+# to the contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+
+TOC_EXPAND = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER
+# are set, an additional index file will be generated that can be used as input for
+# Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help (.qch) of the generated
+# HTML documentation.
+
+GENERATE_QHP = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can
+# be used to specify the file name of the resulting .qch file.
+# The path specified is relative to the HTML output folder.
+
+QCH_FILE =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#namespace">Qt Help Project / Namespace</a>.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating
+# Qt Help Project output. For more information please see
+# <a href="http://doc.trolltech.com/qthelpproject.html#virtual-folders">Qt Help Project / Virtual Folders</a>.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER = doc
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES, the QHG_LOCATION tag can
+# be used to specify the location of Qt's qhelpgenerator.
+# If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the generated
+# .qhp file .
+
+QHG_LOCATION =
+
+# The DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index at
+# top of each HTML page. The value NO (the default) enables the index and
+# the value YES disables it.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX = NO
+
+# This tag can be used to set the number of enum values (range [1..20])
+# that doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE = 1
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information.
+# If the tag value is set to FRAME, a side panel will be generated
+# containing a tree-like index structure (just like the one that
+# is generated for HTML Help). For this to work a browser that supports
+# JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required (for instance Mozilla 1.0+,
+# Netscape 6.0+, Internet explorer 5.0+, or Konqueror). Windows users are
+# probably better off using the HTML help feature. Other possible values
+# for this tag are: HIERARCHIES, which will generate the Groups, Directories,
+# and Class Hierarchy pages using a tree view instead of an ordered list;
+# ALL, which combines the behavior of FRAME and HIERARCHIES; and NONE, which
+# disables this behavior completely. For backwards compatibility with previous
+# releases of Doxygen, the values YES and NO are equivalent to FRAME and NONE
+# respectively.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW = YES
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be
+# used to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree
+# is shown.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH = 250
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of Latex formulas included
+# as images in the HTML documentation. The default is 10. Note that
+# when you change the font size after a successful doxygen run you need
+# to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML output directory
+# to force them to be regenerated.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate Latex output.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default path.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked. If left blank `latex' will be used as the default command name.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to
+# generate index for LaTeX. If left blank `makeindex' will be used as the
+# default command name.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# LaTeX documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used
+# by the printer. Possible values are: a4, a4wide, letter, legal and
+# executive. If left blank a4wide will be used.
+
+PAPER_TYPE = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be to specify one or more names of LaTeX
+# packages that should be included in the LaTeX output.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for
+# the generated latex document. The header should contain everything until
+# the first chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header. Notice: only use this tag if you know what you are doing!
+
+LATEX_HEADER =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated
+# is prepared for conversion to pdf (using ps2pdf). The pdf file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using a pdf viewer.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, pdflatex will be used instead of
+# plain latex in the generated Makefile. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \\batchmode.
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep
+# running if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help.
+# This option is also used when generating formulas in HTML.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE = NO
+
+# If LATEX_HIDE_INDICES is set to YES then doxygen will not
+# include the index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.)
+# in the output.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate RTF output
+# The RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look very pretty with
+# other RTF readers or editors.
+
+GENERATE_RTF = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `rtf' will be used as the default path.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES Doxygen generates more compact
+# RTF documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to
+# save some trees in general.
+
+COMPACT_RTF = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated
+# will contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references.
+# This makes the output suitable for online browsing using WORD or other
+# programs which support those fields.
+# Note: wordpad (write) and others do not support links.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's
+# config file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide
+# replacements, missing definitions are set to their default value.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an rtf document.
+# Syntax is similar to doxygen's config file.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate man pages
+
+GENERATE_MAN = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `man' will be used as the default path.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to
+# the generated man pages (default is the subroutine's section .3)
+
+MAN_EXTENSION = .3
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and Doxygen generates man output,
+# then it will generate one additional man file for each entity
+# documented in the real man page(s). These additional files
+# only source the real man page, but without them the man command
+# would be unable to find the correct page. The default is NO.
+
+MAN_LINKS = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an XML file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation.
+
+GENERATE_XML = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be
+# put in front of it. If left blank `xml' will be used as the default path.
+
+XML_OUTPUT = xml
+
+# The XML_SCHEMA tag can be used to specify an XML schema,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_SCHEMA =
+
+# The XML_DTD tag can be used to specify an XML DTD,
+# which can be used by a validating XML parser to check the
+# syntax of the XML files.
+
+XML_DTD =
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# dump the program listings (including syntax highlighting
+# and cross-referencing information) to the XML output. Note that
+# enabling this will significantly increase the size of the XML output.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate an AutoGen Definitions (see autogen.sf.net) file
+# that captures the structure of the code including all
+# documentation. Note that this feature is still experimental
+# and incomplete at the moment.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES Doxygen will
+# generate a Perl module file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this
+# feature is still experimental and incomplete at the
+# moment.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES Doxygen will generate
+# the necessary Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able
+# to generate PDF and DVI output from the Perl module output.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be
+# nicely formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful
+# if you want to understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this
+# tag is set to NO the size of the Perl module output will be much smaller
+# and Perl will parse it just the same.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file
+# are prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX.
+# This is useful so different doxyrules.make files included by the same
+# Makefile don't overwrite each other's variables.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# evaluate all C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include
+# files.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES Doxygen will expand all macro
+# names in the source code. If set to NO (the default) only conditional
+# compilation will be performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled
+# way by setting EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES
+# then the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the
+# PREDEFINED and EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES (the default) the includes files
+# in the INCLUDE_PATH (see below) will be search if a #include is found.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by
+# the preprocessor.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will
+# be used.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that
+# are defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name
+# or name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the = are
+# omitted =1 is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being
+# undefined via #undef or recursively expanded use the := operator
+# instead of the = operator.
+
+PREDEFINED = __DOXYGEN__
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then
+# this tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded.
+# The macro definition that is found in the sources will be used.
+# Use the PREDEFINED tag if you want to use a different macro definition.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED = BUTTLOADTAG
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES (the default) then
+# doxygen's preprocessor will remove all function-like macros that are alone
+# on a line, have an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such
+# function macros are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse
+# the parser if not removed.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES option can be used to specify one or more tagfiles.
+# Optionally an initial location of the external documentation
+# can be added for each tagfile. The format of a tag file without
+# this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where "loc1" and "loc2" can be relative or absolute paths or
+# URLs. If a location is present for each tag, the installdox tool
+# does not have to be run to correct the links.
+# Note that each tag file must have a unique name
+# (where the name does NOT include the path)
+# If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen
+# is run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create
+# a tag file that is based on the input files it reads.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external classes will be listed
+# in the class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes
+# will be listed.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed
+# in the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will
+# be listed.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of `which perl').
+
+PERL_PATH = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a inheritance diagram (in HTML, RTF and LaTeX) for classes with base
+# or super classes. Setting the tag to NO turns the diagrams off. Note that
+# this option is superseded by the HAVE_DOT option below. This is only a
+# fallback. It is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide
+# inheritance and usage relations if the target is undocumented
+# or is not a class.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz, a graph visualization
+# toolkit from AT&T and Lucent Bell Labs. The other options in this section
+# have no effect if this option is set to NO (the default)
+
+HAVE_DOT = NO
+
+# By default doxygen will write a font called FreeSans.ttf to the output
+# directory and reference it in all dot files that doxygen generates. This
+# font does not include all possible unicode characters however, so when you need
+# these (or just want a differently looking font) you can specify the font name
+# using DOT_FONTNAME. You need need to make sure dot is able to find the font,
+# which can be done by putting it in a standard location or by setting the
+# DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory
+# containing the font.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME = FreeSans
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size of the font of dot graphs.
+# The default size is 10pt.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the output directory to look for the
+# FreeSans.ttf font (which doxygen will put there itself). If you specify a
+# different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set the path where dot
+# can find it using this tag.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect inheritance relations. Setting this tag to YES will force the
+# the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for each documented class showing the direct and
+# indirect implementation dependencies (inheritance, containment, and
+# class references variables) of the class with other documented classes.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will generate a graph for groups, showing the direct groups dependencies
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+
+UML_LOOK = NO
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will show the
+# relations between templates and their instances.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDE_GRAPH, and HAVE_DOT
+# tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented
+# file showing the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with
+# other documented files.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING, SEARCH_INCLUDES, INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, and
+# HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each
+# documented header file showing the documented files that directly or
+# indirectly include this file.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT options are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a call dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs
+# for selected functions only using the \callgraph command.
+
+CALL_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a caller dependency graph for every global function
+# or class method. Note that enabling this option will significantly increase
+# the time of a run. So in most cases it will be better to enable caller
+# graphs for selected functions only using the \callergraph command.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES then doxygen
+# will graphical hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH, SHOW_DIRECTORIES and HAVE_DOT tags are set to YES
+# then doxygen will show the dependencies a directory has on other directories
+# in a graphical way. The dependency relations are determined by the #include
+# relations between the files in the directories.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot. Possible values are png, jpg, or gif
+# If left blank png will be used.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT = png
+
+# The tag DOT_PATH can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+
+DOT_PATH = "C:/Program Files/Graphviz2.18/bin"
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the
+# \dotfile command).
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of
+# nodes that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph
+# becomes larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is
+# visualized by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the
+# number of direct children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note
+# that the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the
+# graphs generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable
+# from the root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes
+# that lay further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this
+# option to 1 or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large
+# code bases. Also note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not
+# seem to support this out of the box. Warning: Depending on the platform used,
+# enabling this option may lead to badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of
+# a graph (i.e. they become hard to read).
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10)
+# support this, this feature is disabled by default.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# generate a legend page explaining the meaning of the various boxes and
+# arrows in the dot generated graphs.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES (the default) Doxygen will
+# remove the intermediate dot files that are used to generate
+# the various graphs.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration::additions related to the search engine
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE tag specifies whether or not a search engine should be
+# used. If set to NO the values of all tags below this one will be ignored.
+
+SEARCHENGINE = NO
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..38755aba8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/PIMACodes.h
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header containing macros for possible PIMA commands. Refer to the PIMA standard
+ * documentation for more information on each PIMA command.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _PIMA_CODES_H_
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ #define PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO 0x1001
+ #define PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION 0x1002
+ #define PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION 0x1003
+
+ #define PIMA_RESPONSE_OK 0x2001
+ #define PIMA_RESPONSE_GENERALERROR 0x2002
+ #define PIMA_RESPONSE_SESSIONNOTOPEN 0x2003
+ #define PIMA_RESPONSE_INVALIDTRANSACTIONID 0x2004
+ #define PIMA_RESPONSE_OPERATIONNOTSUPPORTED 0x2005
+ #define PIMA_RESPONSE_PARAMETERNOTSUPPORTED 0x2006
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8f05e48f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.c
@@ -0,0 +1,279 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Still Image Device commands, to issue PIMA commands to the device for
+ * reading device status, capacity, and other characteristics as well as
+ * reading and writing of stored image data.
+ */
+
+#include "StillImageCommands.h"
+
+/* Globals: */
+/** PIMA block container for the block to send to the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock;
+
+/** PIMA block container for the last received block from the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock;
+
+/** PIMA block container for the last event block received from the device */
+PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock;
+
+
+/** Function to send the PIMA command container to the attached still image device. */
+void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void)
+{
+ /* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe ready for data transmission */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Write the PIMA block to the data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+ /* If the block type is a command, send its parameters (if any) */
+ if (PIMA_SendBlock.Type == CType_CommandBlock)
+ {
+ /* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */
+ uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_SendBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+ /* Check if any parameters in the command block */
+ if (ParamBytes)
+ {
+ /* Write the PIMA parameters to the data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(&PIMA_SendBlock.Params, ParamBytes);
+ }
+
+ /* Send the PIMA command block to the attached device */
+ Pipe_ClearOUT();
+ }
+
+ /* Freeze pipe after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Function to receive a PIMA event container from the attached still image device. */
+void SImage_RecieveEventHeader(void)
+{
+ /* Unfreeze the events pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Read in the event data into the global structure */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_EventBlock, sizeof(PIMA_EventBlock));
+
+ /* Clear the pipe after read complete to prepare for next event */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+ /* Freeze the event pipe again after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Function to receive a PIMA response container from the attached still image device. */
+uint8_t SImage_RecieveBlockHeader(void)
+{
+ uint16_t TimeoutMSRem = COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS;
+
+ /* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Wait until data received on the IN pipe */
+ while (!(Pipe_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+ {
+ /* Check to see if a new frame has been issued (1ms elapsed) */
+ if (USB_INT_HasOccurred(USB_INT_HSOFI))
+ {
+ /* Clear the flag and decrement the timeout period counter */
+ USB_INT_Clear(USB_INT_HSOFI);
+ TimeoutMSRem--;
+
+ /* Check to see if the timeout period for the command has elapsed */
+ if (!(TimeoutMSRem))
+ {
+ /* Return error code */
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_Timeout;
+ }
+ }
+
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+ /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+ if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+ {
+ /* Clear the stall condition on the OUT pipe */
+ SImage_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+ /* Return error code and break out of the loop */
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+ }
+
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+ /* Check if pipe stalled (command failed by device) */
+ if (Pipe_IsStalled())
+ {
+ /* Clear the stall condition on the IN pipe */
+ SImage_ClearPipeStall(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+ /* Return error code */
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_PipeStalled;
+ }
+
+ /* Check to see if the device was disconnected, if so exit function */
+ if (!(USB_IsConnected))
+ {
+ /* Return error code */
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_DeviceDisconnected;
+ }
+ };
+
+ /* Freeze OUT pipe after use */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ /* Select the IN data pipe for data reception */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+
+ /* Load in the response from the attached device */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock, PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+ /* Check if the returned block type is a response block */
+ if (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type == CType_ResponseBlock)
+ {
+ /* Determine the size of the parameters in the block via the data length attribute */
+ uint8_t ParamBytes = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+ /* Check if the device has returned any parameters */
+ if (ParamBytes)
+ {
+ /* Read the PIMA parameters from the data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(&PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Params, ParamBytes);
+ }
+
+ /* Clear pipe bank after use */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+ }
+
+ /* Freeze the IN pipe after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError;
+}
+
+/** Function to send the given data to the device, after a command block has been issued.
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Source data buffer to send to the device
+ * \param Bytes Number of bytes to send
+ */
+void SImage_SendData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+ /* Unfreeze the data OUT pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Write the data contents to the pipe */
+ Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes);
+
+ /* Send the last packet to the attached device */
+ Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+ /* Freeze the pipe again after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Function to receive the given data to the device, after a response block has been received.
+ *
+ * \param Buffer Destination data buffer to put read bytes from the device
+ * \param Bytes Number of bytes to receive
+ *
+ * \return A value from the Pipe_Stream_RW_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ /* Unfreeze the data IN pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* Read in the data into the buffer */
+ ErrorCode = Pipe_Read_Stream_LE(Buffer, Bytes);
+
+ /* Freeze the pipe again after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return ErrorCode;
+}
+
+/** Function to test if a PIMA event block is waiting to be read in from the attached device.
+ *
+ * \return True if an event is waiting to be read in from the device, false otherwise
+ */
+bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void)
+{
+ bool IsEventReceived = false;
+
+ /* Unfreeze the Event pipe */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE);
+ Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+ /* If the pipe contains data, an event has been received */
+ if (Pipe_BytesInPipe())
+ IsEventReceived = true;
+
+ /* Freeze the pipe after use */
+ Pipe_Freeze();
+
+ return IsEventReceived;
+}
+
+/** Clears the stall condition in the attached device on the nominated endpoint number.
+ *
+ * \param EndpointNum Endpoint number in the attached device whose stall condition is to be cleared
+ *
+ * \return A value from the USB_Host_SendControlErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t SImage_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum)
+{
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_ENDPOINT),
+ .bRequest = REQ_ClearFeature,
+ .wValue = FEATURE_ENDPOINT_HALT,
+ .wIndex = EndpointNum,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ return USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ad0ba55a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/Lib/StillImageCommands.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for StillImageCommands.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_
+#define _STILL_IMAGE_COMMANDS_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h> // USB Functionality
+
+ #include "PIMACodes.h"
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** Pipe number of the Still Image data IN pipe */
+ #define SIMAGE_DATA_IN_PIPE 0x01
+
+ /** Pipe number of the Still Image data OUT pipe */
+ #define SIMAGE_DATA_OUT_PIPE 0x02
+
+ /** Pipe number of the Still Image events pipe */
+ #define SIMAGE_EVENTS_PIPE 0x03
+
+ /** Timeout period between the issuing of a command to a device, and the reception of the first packet */
+ #define COMMAND_DATA_TIMEOUT_MS 5000
+
+ /** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
+ * a command container.
+ *
+ * \param params Number of parameters which are to be sent in the Param field of the container
+ */
+ #define PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(params) ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + \
+ (params * sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params[0])))
+
+ /** Used in the DataLength field of a PIMA container, to give the total container size in bytes for
+ * a data container.
+ *
+ * \param datalen Length in bytes of the data in the container
+ */
+ #define PIMA_DATA_SIZE(datalen) ((sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock) - sizeof(PIMA_SendBlock.Params)) + datalen)
+
+ /* Type Defines: */
+ /** Type define for a PIMA container, use to send commands and receive responses to and from an
+ * attached Still Image device.
+ */
+ typedef struct
+ {
+ uint32_t DataLength; /**< Length of the container and data, in bytes */
+ uint16_t Type; /**< Container type, a value from the PIMA_Container_Types_t enum */
+ uint16_t Code; /**< Command, event or response code of the container */
+ uint32_t TransactionID; /**< Unique container ID to link blocks together */
+ uint32_t Params[4]; /**< Block parameters to be issued along with the block code (command blocks only) */
+ } PIMA_Container_t;
+
+ /* Enums: */
+ /** Enum for the possible PIMA contains types. */
+ enum PIMA_Container_Types_t
+ {
+ CType_Undefined = 0, /**< Undefined container type */
+ CType_CommandBlock = 1, /**< Command Block container type */
+ CType_DataBlock = 2, /**< Data Block container type */
+ CType_ResponseBlock = 3, /**< Response container type */
+ CType_EventBlock = 4, /**< Event Block container type */
+ };
+
+ /* External Variables: */
+ extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_SendBlock;
+ extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_ReceivedBlock;
+ extern PIMA_Container_t PIMA_EventBlock;
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void SImage_SendBlockHeader(void);
+ uint8_t SImage_RecieveBlockHeader(void);
+ void SImage_RecieveEventHeader(void);
+ void SImage_SendData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes);
+ uint8_t SImage_ReadData(void* Buffer, uint16_t Bytes);
+ bool SImage_IsEventReceived(void);
+ uint8_t SImage_ClearPipeStall(const uint8_t EndpointNum);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..318e25731
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.c
@@ -0,0 +1,382 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Main source file for the StillImageHost demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ * the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "StillImageHost.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ * starts the scheduler to run the application tasks.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+ SetupHardware();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_RESET ESC_BG_WHITE ESC_INVERSE_ON ESC_ERASE_DISPLAY
+ "Still Image Host Demo running.\r\n" ESC_INVERSE_OFF));
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+ for (;;)
+ {
+ StillImage_Task();
+ USB_USBTask();
+ }
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+ /* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+ MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+ wdt_disable();
+
+ /* Disable Clock Division */
+ CLKPR = (1 << CLKPCE);
+ CLKPR = 0;
+
+ /* Hardware Initialization */
+ SerialStream_Init(9600, false);
+ LEDs_Init();
+ USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ * starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ * stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ * enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+ USB_ShutDown();
+
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+ for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ * enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+ puts_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"));
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"), SubErrorCode);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- In State %d\r\n"), USB_HostState);
+
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Task to set the configuration of the attached device after it has been enumerated, and to print device information
+ * through the serial port.
+ */
+void StillImage_Task(void)
+{
+ uint8_t ErrorCode;
+
+ switch (USB_HostState)
+ {
+ case HOST_STATE_Addressed:
+ /* Standard request to set the device configuration to configuration 1 */
+ USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+ {
+ .bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_STANDARD | REQREC_DEVICE),
+ .bRequest = REQ_SetConfiguration,
+ .wValue = 1,
+ .wIndex = 0,
+ .wLength = 0,
+ };
+
+ /* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+ Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+ /* Send the request, display error and wait for device detach if request fails */
+ if (USB_Host_SendControlRequest(NULL) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+ {
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control error.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Configured;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Configured:
+ puts_P(PSTR("Getting Config Data.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+ if ((ErrorCode = ProcessConfigurationDescriptor()) != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+ {
+ if (ErrorCode == ControlError)
+ puts_P(PSTR("Control Error (Get Configuration).\r\n"));
+ else
+ puts_P(PSTR("Invalid Device.\r\n"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code: %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Still Image Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+
+ USB_HostState = HOST_STATE_Ready;
+ break;
+ case HOST_STATE_Ready:
+ /* Indicate device busy via the status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Retrieving Device Info...\r\n"));
+
+ PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+ {
+ .DataLength = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0),
+ .Type = CType_CommandBlock,
+ .Code = PIMA_OPERATION_GETDEVICEINFO,
+ .TransactionID = 0x00000000,
+ .Params = {},
+ };
+
+ /* Send the GETDEVICEINFO block */
+ SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+
+ /* Receive the response data block */
+ if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Calculate the size of the returned device info data structure */
+ uint16_t DeviceInfoSize = (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.DataLength - PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(0));
+
+ /* Create a buffer large enough to hold the entire device info */
+ uint8_t DeviceInfo[DeviceInfoSize];
+
+ /* Read in the data block data (containing device info) */
+ SImage_ReadData(DeviceInfo, DeviceInfoSize);
+
+ /* Once all the data has been read, the pipe must be cleared before the response can be sent */
+ Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+ /* Create a pointer for walking through the info dataset */
+ uint8_t* DeviceInfoPos = DeviceInfo;
+
+ /* Skip over the data before the unicode device information strings */
+ DeviceInfoPos += 8; // Skip to VendorExtensionDesc String
+ DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over VendorExtensionDesc String
+ DeviceInfoPos += 2; // Skip over FunctionalMode
+ DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over OperationCode Array
+ DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over EventCode Array
+ DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over DevicePropCode Array
+ DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over ObjectFormatCode Array
+ DeviceInfoPos += (4 + (*(uint32_t*)DeviceInfoPos << 1)); // Skip over ObjectFormatCode Array
+
+ /* Extract and convert the Manufacturer Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+ char Manufacturer[*DeviceInfoPos];
+ UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Manufacturer);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" Manufacturer: %s\r\n"), Manufacturer);
+
+ DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over Manufacturer String
+
+ /* Extract and convert the Model Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+ char Model[*DeviceInfoPos];
+ UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, Model);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" Model: %s\r\n"), Model);
+
+ DeviceInfoPos += ((*DeviceInfoPos << 1) + 1); // Skip over Model String
+
+ /* Extract and convert the Device Version Unicode string to ASCII and print it through the USART */
+ char DeviceVersion[*DeviceInfoPos];
+ UnicodeToASCII(DeviceInfoPos, DeviceVersion);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" Device Version: %s\r\n"), DeviceVersion);
+
+ /* Receive the final response block from the device */
+ if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+ if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+ {
+ ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Opening Session...\r\n"));
+
+ PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+ {
+ .DataLength = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
+ .Type = CType_CommandBlock,
+ .Code = PIMA_OPERATION_OPENSESSION,
+ .TransactionID = 0x00000000,
+ .Params = {0x00000001},
+ };
+
+ /* Send the OPENSESSION block, open a session with an ID of 0x0001 */
+ SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+
+ /* Receive the response block from the device */
+ if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+ if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+ {
+ ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Closing Session...\r\n"));
+
+ PIMA_SendBlock = (PIMA_Container_t)
+ {
+ .DataLength = PIMA_COMMAND_SIZE(1),
+ .Type = CType_CommandBlock,
+ .Code = PIMA_OPERATION_CLOSESESSION,
+ .TransactionID = 0x00000001,
+ .Params = {0x00000001},
+ };
+
+ /* Send the CLOSESESSION block, close the session with an ID of 0x0001 */
+ SImage_SendBlockHeader();
+
+ /* Receive the response block from the device */
+ if ((ErrorCode = SImage_RecieveBlockHeader()) != PIPE_RWSTREAM_NoError)
+ {
+ ShowCommandError(ErrorCode, false);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ /* Verify that the command completed successfully */
+ if ((PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Type != CType_ResponseBlock) || (PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code != PIMA_RESPONSE_OK))
+ {
+ ShowCommandError(PIMA_ReceivedBlock.Code, true);
+ break;
+ }
+
+ puts_P(PSTR("Done.\r\n"));
+
+ /* Indicate device no longer busy */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+
+ break;
+ }
+}
+
+/** Function to convert a given Unicode encoded string to ASCII. This function will only work correctly on Unicode
+ * strings which contain ASCII printable characters only.
+ *
+ * \param UnicodeString Pointer to a Unicode encoded input string
+ * \param Buffer Pointer to a buffer where the converted ASCII string should be stored
+ */
+void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* UnicodeString, char* Buffer)
+{
+ /* Get the number of characters in the string, skip to the start of the string data */
+ uint8_t CharactersRemaining = *(UnicodeString++);
+
+ /* Loop through the entire unicode string */
+ while (CharactersRemaining--)
+ {
+ /* Load in the next unicode character (only the lower byte, only Unicode coded ASCII supported) */
+ *(Buffer++) = *UnicodeString;
+
+ /* Jump to the next unicode character */
+ UnicodeString += 2;
+ }
+
+ /* Null terminate the string */
+ *Buffer = 0;
+}
+
+/** Displays a PIMA command error via the device's serial port.
+ *
+ * \param ErrorCode Error code of the function which failed to complete successfully
+ * \param ResponseCodeError Indicates if the error is due to a command failed indication from the device, or a communication failure
+ */
+void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError)
+{
+ char* FailureType = ((ResponseCodeError) ? PSTR("Response Code != OK") : PSTR("Transaction Fail"));
+
+ printf_P(PSTR(ESC_BG_RED "Command Error (%S).\r\n"), FailureType);
+ printf_P(PSTR(" -- Error Code %d\r\n"), ErrorCode);
+
+ /* Indicate error via status LEDs */
+ LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+
+ /* Wait until USB device disconnected */
+ while (USB_IsConnected);
+}
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1896b8fe5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+ LUFA Library
+ Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2009.
+
+ dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+ www.fourwalledcubicle.com
+*/
+
+/*
+ Copyright 2009 Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+ Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software
+ and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby
+ granted, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all
+ copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+ permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+ documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+ advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+ software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+ The author disclaim all warranties with regard to this
+ software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+ and fitness. In no event shall the author be liable for any
+ special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+ whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+ in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+ arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+ this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ * Header file for StillImageHost.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+#define _STILL_IMAGE_HOST_H_
+
+ /* Includes: */
+ #include <avr/io.h>
+ #include <avr/wdt.h>
+ #include <avr/power.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+
+ #include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+ #include "Lib/PIMACodes.h"
+ #include "Lib/StillImageCommands.h"
+
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.h>
+ #include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+ /* Macros: */
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY LEDS_LED1
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_READY (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+ /** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+ #define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY (LEDS_LED2)
+
+ /* Function Prototypes: */
+ void StillImage_Task(void);
+ void SetupHardware(void);
+
+ void EVENT_USB_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceAttached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceUnattached(void);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+ void EVENT_USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+ void UnicodeToASCII(uint8_t* restrict UnicodeString, char* restrict Buffer);
+ void ShowCommandError(uint8_t ErrorCode, bool ResponseCodeError);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4cdfe6346
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/StillImageHost.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ * This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ * documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Still Image Host Demo
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ * The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ * <td>Host</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ * <td>Still Image Device</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ * <td>N/A</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ * <td>USBIF Still Image Class Specification</td>
+ * <td>PIMA 15740 Specification</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td><b>Usable Speeds:</b></td>
+ * <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ * Still Image host demonstration application. This gives a simple reference
+ * application for implementing a Still Image host, for USB devices such as
+ * digital cameras.
+ *
+ * This demo will enumerate an attached USB Still Image device, print out its
+ * information structure, open a session with the device and finally close the
+ * session.
+ *
+ * \section SSec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ * The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ * <tr>
+ * <td>
+ * None
+ * </td>
+ * </tr>
+ * </table>
+ */
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a4428c565
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Demos/Host/ClassDriver/StillImageHost/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,733 @@
+# Hey Emacs, this is a -*- makefile -*-
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# WinAVR Makefile Template written by Eric B. Weddington, J�rg Wunsch, et al.
+# >> Modified for use with the LUFA project. <<
+#
+# Released to the Public Domain
+#
+# Additional material for this makefile was written by:
+# Peter Fleury
+# Tim Henigan
+# Colin O'Flynn
+# Reiner Patommel
+# Markus Pfaff
+# Sander Pool
+# Frederik Rouleau
+# Carlos Lamas
+# Dean Camera
+# Opendous Inc.
+# Denver Gingerich
+#
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# On command line:
+#
+# make all = Make software.
+#
+# make clean = Clean out built project files.
+#
+# make coff = Convert ELF to AVR COFF.
+#
+# make extcoff = Convert ELF to AVR Extended COFF.
+#
+# make program = Download the hex file to the device, using avrdude.
+# Please customize the avrdude settings below first!
+#
+# make dfu = Download the hex file to the device, using dfu-programmer (must
+# have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip = Download the hex file to the device, using Atmel FLIP (must
+# have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make dfu-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using dfu-programmer
+# (must have dfu-programmer installed).
+#
+# make flip-ee = Download the eeprom file to the device, using Atmel FLIP
+# (must have Atmel FLIP installed).
+#
+# make doxygen = Generate DoxyGen documentation for the project (must have
+# DoxyGen installed)
+#
+# make debug = Start either simulavr or avarice as specified for debugging,
+# with avr-gdb or avr-insight as the front end for debugging.
+#
+# make filename.s = Just compile filename.c into the assembler code only.
+#
+# make filename.i = Create a preprocessed source file for use in submitting
+# bug reports to the GCC project.
+#
+# To rebuild project do "make clean" then "make all".
+#----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# MCU name
+MCU = at90usb1287
+
+
+# Target board (see library "Board Types" documentation, USER or blank for projects not requiring
+# LUFA board drivers). If USER is selected, put custom board drivers in a directory called
+# "Board" inside the application directory.
+BOARD = USBKEY
+
+
+# Processor frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CPU, in all source code files equal to the
+# processor frequency. You can then use this symbol in your source code to
+# calculate timings. Do NOT tack on a 'UL' at the end, this will be done
+# automatically to create a 32-bit value in your source code.
+# Typical values are:
+# F_CPU = 1000000
+# F_CPU = 1843200
+# F_CPU = 2000000
+# F_CPU = 3686400
+# F_CPU = 4000000
+# F_CPU = 7372800
+# F_CPU = 8000000
+# F_CPU = 11059200
+# F_CPU = 14745600
+# F_CPU = 16000000
+# F_CPU = 18432000
+# F_CPU = 20000000
+F_CPU = 8000000
+
+
+# Input clock frequency.
+# This will define a symbol, F_CLOCK, in all source code files equal to the
+# input clock frequency (before any prescaling is performed). This value may
+# differ from F_CPU if prescaling is used on the latter, and is required as the
+# raw input clock is fed directly to the PLL sections of the AVR for high speed
+# clock generation for the USB and other AVR subsections. Do NOT tack on a 'UL'
+# at the end, this will be done automatically to create a 32-bit value in your
+# source code.
+#
+# If no clock division is performed on the input clock inside the AVR (via the
+# CPU clock adjust registers or the clock division fuses), this will be equal to F_CPU.
+F_CLOCK = 8000000
+
+
+# Output format. (can be srec, ihex, binary)
+FORMAT = ihex
+
+
+# Target file name (without extension).
+TARGET = StillImageHost
+
+
+# Object files directory
+# To put object files in current directory, use a dot (.), do NOT make
+# this an empty or blank macro!
+OBJDIR = .
+
+
+# Path to the LUFA library
+LUFA_PATH = ../../../..
+
+
+# List C source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+SRC = $(TARGET).c \
+ ConfigDescriptor.c \
+ Lib/StillImageCommands.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SerialStream.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/DevChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Endpoint.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Host.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/HostChapter9.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/LowLevel.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/LowLevel/Pipe.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/Events.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBInterrupt.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/USBTask.c \
+ $(LUFA_PATH)/LUFA/Drivers/USB/HighLevel/ConfigDescriptor.c \
+
+
+# List C++ source files here. (C dependencies are automatically generated.)
+CPPSRC =
+
+
+# List Assembler source files here.
+# Make them always end in a capital .S. Files ending in a lowercase .s
+# will not be considered source files but generated files (assembler
+# output from the compiler), and will be deleted upon "make clean"!
+# Even though the DOS/Win* filesystem matches both .s and .S the same,
+# it will preserve the spelling of the filenames, and gcc itself does
+# care about how the name is spelled on its command-line.
+ASRC =
+
+
+# Optimization level, can be [0, 1, 2, 3, s].
+# 0 = turn off optimization. s = optimize for size.
+# (Note: 3 is not always the best optimization level. See avr-libc FAQ.)
+OPT = s
+
+
+# Debugging format.
+# Native formats for AVR-GCC's -g are dwarf-2 [default] or stabs.
+# AVR Studio 4.10 requires dwarf-2.
+# AVR [Extended] COFF format requires stabs, plus an avr-objcopy run.
+DEBUG = dwarf-2
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for include files here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRAINCDIRS = $(LUFA_PATH)/
+
+
+# Compiler flag to set the C Standard level.
+# c89 = "ANSI" C
+# gnu89 = c89 plus GCC extensions
+# c99 = ISO C99 standard (not yet fully implemented)
+# gnu99 = c99 plus GCC extensions
+CSTANDARD = -std=gnu99
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C sources
+CDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL -DF_CLOCK=$(F_CLOCK)UL -DBOARD=BOARD_$(BOARD)
+CDEFS += -DUSE_NONSTANDARD_DESCRIPTOR_NAMES -DNO_STREAM_CALLBACKS -DUSB_HOST_ONLY
+CDEFS += -DUSE_STATIC_OPTIONS="(USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)"
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for ASM sources
+ADEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)
+
+
+# Place -D or -U options here for C++ sources
+CPPDEFS = -DF_CPU=$(F_CPU)UL
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_LIMIT_MACROS
+#CPPDEFS += -D__STDC_CONSTANT_MACROS
+
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CFLAGS += $(CDEFS)
+CFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CFLAGS += -ffunction-sections
+CFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CFLAGS += -finline-limit=20
+CFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+CFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Compiler Options C++ ----------------
+# -g*: generate debugging information
+# -O*: optimization level
+# -f...: tuning, see GCC manual and avr-libc documentation
+# -Wall...: warning level
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns...: create assembler listing
+CPPFLAGS = -g$(DEBUG)
+CPPFLAGS += $(CPPDEFS)
+CPPFLAGS += -O$(OPT)
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-char
+CPPFLAGS += -funsigned-bitfields
+CPPFLAGS += -fpack-struct
+CPPFLAGS += -fshort-enums
+CPPFLAGS += -fno-exceptions
+CPPFLAGS += -Wall
+CFLAGS += -Wundef
+#CPPFLAGS += -mshort-calls
+#CPPFLAGS += -fno-unit-at-a-time
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wstrict-prototypes
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wunreachable-code
+#CPPFLAGS += -Wsign-compare
+CPPFLAGS += -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+CPPFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-I%,$(EXTRAINCDIRS))
+#CPPFLAGS += $(CSTANDARD)
+
+
+#---------------- Assembler Options ----------------
+# -Wa,...: tell GCC to pass this to the assembler.
+# -adhlns: create listing
+# -gstabs: have the assembler create line number information; note that
+# for use in COFF files, additional information about filenames
+# and function names needs to be present in the assembler source
+# files -- see avr-libc docs [FIXME: not yet described there]
+# -listing-cont-lines: Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex
+# dump that will be displayed for a given single line of source input.
+ASFLAGS = $(ADEFS) -Wa,-adhlns=$(<:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst),-gstabs,--listing-cont-lines=100
+
+
+#---------------- Library Options ----------------
+# Minimalistic printf version
+PRINTF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_min
+
+# Floating point printf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfprintf -lprintf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard printf version.
+PRINTF_LIB =
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_MIN)
+#PRINTF_LIB = $(PRINTF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+# Minimalistic scanf version
+SCANF_LIB_MIN = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_min
+
+# Floating point + %[ scanf version (requires MATH_LIB = -lm below)
+SCANF_LIB_FLOAT = -Wl,-u,vfscanf -lscanf_flt
+
+# If this is left blank, then it will use the Standard scanf version.
+SCANF_LIB =
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_MIN)
+#SCANF_LIB = $(SCANF_LIB_FLOAT)
+
+
+MATH_LIB = -lm
+
+
+# List any extra directories to look for libraries here.
+# Each directory must be seperated by a space.
+# Use forward slashes for directory separators.
+# For a directory that has spaces, enclose it in quotes.
+EXTRALIBDIRS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- External Memory Options ----------------
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# used for variables (.data/.bss) and heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,-Tdata=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+# 64 KB of external RAM, starting after internal RAM (ATmega128!),
+# only used for heap (malloc()).
+#EXTMEMOPTS = -Wl,--section-start,.data=0x801100,--defsym=__heap_end=0x80ffff
+
+EXTMEMOPTS =
+
+
+
+#---------------- Linker Options ----------------
+# -Wl,...: tell GCC to pass this to linker.
+# -Map: create map file
+# --cref: add cross reference to map file
+LDFLAGS = -Wl,-Map=$(TARGET).map,--cref
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--relax
+LDFLAGS += -Wl,--gc-sections
+LDFLAGS += $(EXTMEMOPTS)
+LDFLAGS += $(patsubst %,-L%,$(EXTRALIBDIRS))
+LDFLAGS += $(PRINTF_LIB) $(SCANF_LIB) $(MATH_LIB)
+#LDFLAGS += -T linker_script.x
+
+
+
+#---------------- Programming Options (avrdude) ----------------
+
+# Programming hardware: alf avr910 avrisp bascom bsd
+# dt006 pavr picoweb pony-stk200 sp12 stk200 stk500
+#
+# Type: avrdude -c ?
+# to get a full listing.
+#
+AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER = jtagmkII
+
+# com1 = serial port. Use lpt1 to connect to parallel port.
+AVRDUDE_PORT = usb
+
+AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH = -U flash:w:$(TARGET).hex
+#AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM = -U eeprom:w:$(TARGET).eep
+
+
+# Uncomment the following if you want avrdude's erase cycle counter.
+# Note that this counter needs to be initialized first using -Yn,
+# see avrdude manual.
+#AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER = -y
+
+# Uncomment the following if you do /not/ wish a verification to be
+# performed after programming the device.
+#AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY = -V
+
+# Increase verbosity level. Please use this when submitting bug
+# reports about avrdude. See <http://savannah.nongnu.org/projects/avrdude>
+# to submit bug reports.
+#AVRDUDE_VERBOSE = -v -v
+
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS = -p $(MCU) -P $(AVRDUDE_PORT) -c $(AVRDUDE_PROGRAMMER)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_NO_VERIFY)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_VERBOSE)
+AVRDUDE_FLAGS += $(AVRDUDE_ERASE_COUNTER)
+
+
+
+#---------------- Debugging Options ----------------
+
+# For simulavr only - target MCU frequency.
+DEBUG_MFREQ = $(F_CPU)
+
+# Set the DEBUG_UI to either gdb or insight.
+# DEBUG_UI = gdb
+DEBUG_UI = insight
+
+# Set the debugging back-end to either avarice, simulavr.
+DEBUG_BACKEND = avarice
+#DEBUG_BACKEND = simulavr
+
+# GDB Init Filename.
+GDBINIT_FILE = __avr_gdbinit
+
+# When using avarice settings for the JTAG
+JTAG_DEV = /dev/com1
+
+# Debugging port used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr.
+DEBUG_PORT = 4242
+
+# Debugging host used to communicate between GDB / avarice / simulavr, normally
+# just set to localhost unless doing some sort of crazy debugging when
+# avarice is running on a different computer.
+DEBUG_HOST = localhost
+
+
+
+#============================================================================
+
+
+# Define programs and commands.
+SHELL = sh
+CC = avr-gcc
+OBJCOPY = avr-objcopy
+OBJDUMP = avr-objdump
+SIZE = avr-size
+AR = avr-ar rcs
+NM = avr-nm
+AVRDUDE = avrdude
+REMOVE = rm -f
+REMOVEDIR = rm -rf
+COPY = cp
+WINSHELL = cmd
+
+# Define Messages
+# English
+MSG_ERRORS_NONE = Errors: none
+MSG_BEGIN = -------- begin --------
+MSG_END = -------- end --------
+MSG_SIZE_BEFORE = Size before:
+MSG_SIZE_AFTER = Size after:
+MSG_COFF = Converting to AVR COFF:
+MSG_EXTENDED_COFF = Converting to AVR Extended COFF:
+MSG_FLASH = Creating load file for Flash:
+MSG_EEPROM = Creating load file for EEPROM:
+MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING = Creating Extended Listing:
+MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE = Creating Symbol Table:
+MSG_LINKING = Linking:
+MSG_COMPILING = Compiling C:
+MSG_COMPILING_CPP = Compiling C++:
+MSG_ASSEMBLING = Assembling:
+MSG_CLEANING = Cleaning project:
+MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY = Creating library:
+
+
+
+
+# Define all object files.
+OBJ = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.o) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+
+# Define all listing files.
+LST = $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(CPPSRC:%.cpp=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst) $(ASRC:%.S=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+
+
+# Compiler flags to generate dependency files.
+GENDEPFLAGS = -MMD -MP -MF .dep/$(@F).d
+
+
+# Combine all necessary flags and optional flags.
+# Add target processor to flags.
+ALL_CFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_CPPFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x c++ $(CPPFLAGS) $(GENDEPFLAGS)
+ALL_ASFLAGS = -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. -x assembler-with-cpp $(ASFLAGS)
+
+
+
+
+
+# Default target.
+all: begin gccversion sizebefore build checkhooks checklibmode checkboard sizeafter end
+
+# Change the build target to build a HEX file or a library.
+build: elf hex eep lss sym
+#build: lib
+
+
+elf: $(TARGET).elf
+hex: $(TARGET).hex
+eep: $(TARGET).eep
+lss: $(TARGET).lss
+sym: $(TARGET).sym
+LIBNAME=lib$(TARGET).a
+lib: $(LIBNAME)
+
+
+
+# Eye candy.
+# AVR Studio 3.x does not check make's exit code but relies on
+# the following magic strings to be generated by the compile job.
+begin:
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_BEGIN)
+
+end:
+ @echo $(MSG_END)
+ @echo
+
+
+# Display size of file.
+HEXSIZE = $(SIZE) --target=$(FORMAT) $(TARGET).hex
+ELFSIZE = $(SIZE) $(MCU_FLAG) $(FORMAT_FLAG) $(TARGET).elf
+MCU_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --mcu > /dev/null && echo --mcu=$(MCU) )
+FORMAT_FLAG = $(shell $(SIZE) --help | grep -- --format=.*avr > /dev/null && echo --format=avr )
+
+sizebefore:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_BEFORE); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+sizeafter:
+ @if test -f $(TARGET).elf; then echo; echo $(MSG_SIZE_AFTER); $(ELFSIZE); \
+ 2>/dev/null; echo; fi
+
+checkhooks: build
+ @echo
+ @echo ------- Unhooked LUFA Events -------
+ @$(shell) (grep -s '^EVENT_.*LUFA/.*\\.o' $(TARGET).map | \
+ cut -d' ' -f1 | cut -d'_' -f2- | grep ".*") || \
+ echo "(None)"
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checklibmode:
+ @echo
+ @echo ----------- Library Mode -----------
+ @$(shell) ($(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) -E -dM - < /dev/null \
+ | grep 'USB_\(DEVICE\|HOST\)_ONLY' | cut -d' ' -f2 | grep ".*") \
+ || echo "No specific mode (both device and host mode allowable)."
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+checkboard:
+ @echo
+ @echo ---------- Selected Board ----------
+ @echo Selected board model is $(BOARD).
+ @echo ------------------------------------
+
+# Display compiler version information.
+gccversion :
+ @$(CC) --version
+
+
+
+# Program the device.
+program: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ $(AVRDUDE) $(AVRDUDE_FLAGS) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_FLASH) $(AVRDUDE_WRITE_EEPROM)
+
+flip: $(TARGET).hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation erase f
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation loadbuffer $(TARGET).hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu: $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) erase
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash --debug 1 $(TARGET).hex
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+flip-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ copy $(TARGET).eep $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM erase
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation memory EEPROM loadbuffer $(TARGET)eep.hex program
+ batchisp -hardware usb -device $(MCU) -operation start reset 0
+
+dfu-ee: $(TARGET).hex $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) flash-eeprom --debug 1 --suppress-bootloader-mem $(TARGET).eep
+ dfu-programmer $(MCU) reset
+
+
+# Generate avr-gdb config/init file which does the following:
+# define the reset signal, load the target file, connect to target, and set
+# a breakpoint at main().
+gdb-config:
+ @$(REMOVE) $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo define reset >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo SIGNAL SIGHUP >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo end >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo file $(TARGET).elf >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ @echo target remote $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT) >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND),simulavr)
+ @echo load >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+endif
+ @echo break main >> $(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+debug: gdb-config $(TARGET).elf
+ifeq ($(DEBUG_BACKEND), avarice)
+ @echo Starting AVaRICE - Press enter when "waiting to connect" message displays.
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avarice --jtag $(JTAG_DEV) --erase --program --file \
+ $(TARGET).elf $(DEBUG_HOST):$(DEBUG_PORT)
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c pause
+
+else
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start simulavr --gdbserver --device $(MCU) --clock-freq \
+ $(DEBUG_MFREQ) --port $(DEBUG_PORT)
+endif
+ @$(WINSHELL) /c start avr-$(DEBUG_UI) --command=$(GDBINIT_FILE)
+
+
+
+
+# Convert ELF to COFF for use in debugging / simulating in AVR Studio or VMLAB.
+COFFCONVERT = $(OBJCOPY) --debugging
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .data-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .bss-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .noinit-0x800000
+COFFCONVERT += --change-section-address .eeprom-0x810000
+
+
+
+coff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+extcoff: $(TARGET).elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_COFF) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(COFFCONVERT) -O coff-ext-avr $< $(TARGET).cof
+
+
+
+# Create final output files (.hex, .eep) from ELF output file.
+%.hex: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_FLASH) $@
+ $(OBJCOPY) -O $(FORMAT) -R .eeprom $< $@
+
+%.eep: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EEPROM) $@
+ -$(OBJCOPY) -j .eeprom --set-section-flags=.eeprom="alloc,load" \
+ --change-section-lma .eeprom=0 --no-change-warnings -O $(FORMAT) $< $@ || exit 0
+
+# Create extended listing file from ELF output file.
+%.lss: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_EXTENDED_LISTING) $@
+ $(OBJDUMP) -h -z -S $< > $@
+
+# Create a symbol table from ELF output file.
+%.sym: %.elf
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_SYMBOL_TABLE) $@
+ $(NM) -n $< > $@
+
+
+
+# Create library from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).a
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.a: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_CREATING_LIBRARY) $@
+ $(AR) $@ $(OBJ)
+
+
+# Link: create ELF output file from object files.
+.SECONDARY : $(TARGET).elf
+.PRECIOUS : $(OBJ)
+%.elf: $(OBJ)
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_LINKING) $@
+ $(CC) $(ALL_CFLAGS) $^ --output $@ $(LDFLAGS)
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.c
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create object files from C++ source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.cpp
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_COMPILING_CPP) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C source files.
+%.s : %.c
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Compile: create assembler files from C++ source files.
+%.s : %.cpp
+ $(CC) -S $(ALL_CPPFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Assemble: create object files from assembler source files.
+$(OBJDIR)/%.o : %.S
+ @echo
+ @echo $(MSG_ASSEMBLING) $<
+ $(CC) -c $(ALL_ASFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Create preprocessed source for use in sending a bug report.
+%.i : %.c
+ $(CC) -E -mmcu=$(MCU) -I. $(CFLAGS) $< -o $@
+
+
+# Target: clean project.
+clean: begin clean_list clean_binary end
+
+clean_binary:
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).hex
+
+clean_list:
+ @echo $(MSG_CLEANING)
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).eep
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET)eep.hex
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).cof
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).elf
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).map
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).sym
+ $(REMOVE) $(TARGET).lss
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.o)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:%.c=$(OBJDIR)/%.lst)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.s)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.d)
+ $(REMOVE) $(SRC:.c=.i)
+ $(REMOVEDIR) .dep
+
+
+doxygen:
+ @echo Generating Project Documentation...
+ @doxygen Doxygen.conf
+ @echo Documentation Generation Complete.
+
+clean_doxygen:
+ rm -rf Documentation
+
+# Create object files directory
+$(shell mkdir $(OBJDIR) 2>/dev/null)
+
+
+# Include the dependency files.
+-include $(shell mkdir .dep 2>/dev/null) $(wildcard .dep/*)
+
+
+# Listing of phony targets.
+.PHONY : all checkhooks checklibmode checkboard \
+begin finish end sizebefore sizeafter gccversion \
+build elf hex eep lss sym coff extcoff clean \
+clean_list clean_binary program debug gdb-config \
+doxygen dfu flip flip-ee dfu-ee
\ No newline at end of file
--
cgit v1.2.3